Loading...
HomeMy Public PortalAboutORD14406 BILL NO. 2008-59 SPONSORED BY COUNCILMAN Penfold ORDINANCE NO. 1 -' ` AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI, AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR AND CITY CLERK TO EXECUTE AN AGREEMENT WITH UNITED HRB GENERAL CONTRACTORS, INC. FOR CONSTRUCTION OF A BUS TRANSFER STATION AT 820 E. MILLER STREET. WHEREAS, United HRB General Contractors, Inc. has become the apparent lowest and best bidder on the Bus Transfer Station project; NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ENACTED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI, AS FOLLOWS: Section 1. The bid of United HRB General Contractors, Inc. is declared to be the lowest and best bid and is hereby accepted. Section 2.The Mayor and City Clerk are hereby authorized to execute an agreement with United HRB General Contractors, Inc. for Bus Transfer Station at 820 E. Miller Street. • Section 3. The agreement shall be substantially the same in form and content as that agreement attached hereto as Exhibit A. Section 4. This Ordinance shall be in full force and effect from and after the date of its passage and approval. Passed: Jlrl�t. Ap roved: siding Officer Mayor ATTEST: APPRO S TO FOR City Clerk City selor r CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A►:.r:ai�.w'� CITY OF • a y F � r1 x y t rt yyw afi1.._ y°iv¢ t M1 x i k•. �� rM. 4 '-� s ya r ¢s a f ti NN trrg 1 1 • SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1 PROJECT NO. 63015 ' Bus Transfer Station 820 E. Miller 1 ' Jefferson City Department of Community Development July, 2008 1 • 1 ' TABLE OF CONTENTS • • Advertisement for Bids ' 0 Notice to Bidders • Information for Bidders • Bid Form * ' 0 Bid Bond * • Anti-Collusion Statement • Contractor's Affidavit * ' 0 Minority Business Enterprise Statement • Minority Business Utilization Agreement ' 0 Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Law ' • Prevailing Wage Determination • Affidavit of Compliance Public Works Contracts Law ' • Excessive Unemployment Exception Certification t 0 Construction Contract • Performance, Payment, and Guarantee Bond • General Provisions ' 9 Special Provisions • Attachments ' Addendums ( If Any ) ' (* INDICATES THIS ITEM INCLUDED IN BID PACKET FOR SUBMISSION OF BID) • 1 1 • ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS ' Sealed bids will be received at the office of the Purchasing Agent, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101, until 1:30 PM,on Tuesday,July 22,2008. The bids will be opened and read aloud in the Council Chambers at 1:30 PM on that same ' day. The proposed work for the project entitled "Project No. 63015, Bus Transfer Station ' 820 E. Miller" will include the furnishing of all material, labor, and equipment to construct restroom facilities, bus stop shelter, and sidewalks at 820 East Miller Street. ' A pre-bid conference will be held at 9:00 AM, on Tuesday, July 15, 2008 in the Thomas Jefferson Conference Room of City Hall, 320 E, McCarty Street, Jefferson City, MO 65101. All prospective bidders are urged to attend. Copies of the contract documents required for bidding purposes may be obtained from ' the Director of Community Development, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri. A non-refundable deposit of Fifteen Dollars ($15.00) will be required for each set of plans and specifications. The contract will require compliance with the wage and labor requirements and the payment of minimum wages in accordance with the Schedule of Wage Rates established by the Missouri Division of Labor Standards. The City reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive informalities therein, ' to determine which is the lowest and best bid and to approve the bond. ' CITY OF JEFFERSON Terry Stephenson Purchasing Agent ' Publication Date Sunday, July 6, 2008 1 1 NOTICE TO BIDDERS • ' Sealed bids will be received at the Office of the Purchasing Agent, City Hall, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri, until 1:30 PM on Tuesday, July 22, 2008. The bids will be opened and read aloud in the Council Chambers at 1:30 PM on that same day. ' The proposed work for the project entitled "Project No. 63015, Bus Transfer Station 820 E. Miller" will include the furnishing of all material, labor, and equipment to construct restroom facilities, bus stop shelter, and sidewalks at 820 East Miller Street. ' A pre-bid conference will be held at 9:00 AM, on Tuesday, July 15, 2008 in the Thomas Jefferson Conference Room of City Hall, 320 E. McCarty Street, Jefferson City, MO 65101. All prospective bidders are urged to attend. All equipment, material, and workmanship must be in accordance with the plans, specifications, and contract documents on file with the Director of Community Development, Jefferson City, Missouri. ' Copies of the contract documents required for bidding purposes may be obtained from the Director of Community Development, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri. A non-refundable deposit of Fifteen Dollars ($15.00) will be required for ' • each set of plans and specifications. A certified check on a solvent bank or a bid bond by a satisfactory surety in an amount ' equal to five(5) percent of the total amount of the bid must accompany each proposal. A one-year Performance and Guarantee Bond is required. The owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive informalities therein to determine which is the lowest and best bid and to approve the bond. ' CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI Patrick E. Sullivan, PE Director of Community Development • 1 ' INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS • ' IB-1 SCOPE OF WORK The work to be done under this contract includes the furnishing of all technical personnel, labor, ' materials, and equipment required to perform the work included in the project entitled"Project No. 63015, Bus Transfer Station 820 E. Miller" in accordance with the plans and specifications on file with the Department of Community Development. ' The proposed work for this project will include the furnishing of all material, labor, and equipment to construct restroom facilities, bus stop shelter, and sidewalks at 820 East ' Miller Street. IB-2 INSPECTION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND SITE OF WORK ' The bidder is required to examine carefully the site of the proposed work, the bid, plans, specifications,supplemental specifications,special provisions,and contract documents before 1 submitting a bid. Failure to do so will not relieve a successful bidder of the obligation to furnish all materials and labor necessary to carry out the provisions of the contract. ' IB-3 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS If the bidder has any questions which arise concerning the true meaning or intent of the Plans, Specifications or any part thereof, which affect the cost, quality, quantity, or character of the project, he shall request in writing, at least five (5) days prior to the date fixed for the bid opening, that an interpretation be made and an addendum be issued by the City, which shall then be delivered to all bidders to whom Plans and Specifications have been issued. All addenda issued shall become part of the contract documents. Failure to have requested an addendum covering any questions affecting the interpretation of the Plans and Specifications shall not relieve the Contractor from delivering the completed project in accordance with the intent of the Plans and Specifications to provide a workable project. IB-4 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS ' The City of Jefferson may make such investigations as deemed necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work and the bidder shall furnish to the City all such ' information and data for this purpose as the City may request. The City reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by the bidder or investigation of such bidder fails to satisfy the City that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract 1 and to complete the work contemplated therein. IB-5 EQUIVALENT MATERIAL ' Wherever definite reference is made in these Specifications to the use of any particular material or equipment, it is to be understood that any equivalent material or equipment may be used which will perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design,subject to the approval of the City. • r ' I13-6 BID SECURITY Each bid must be accompanied by a certified check or bid bond made payable to the City of ' Jefferson for five percent (5%) of the amount of the bid. Bid securities will be returned after award of the contract except to the successful bidder. Should the successful bidder fail or refuse to execute the bond and the contract required within seven (7)days after he has received notice of acceptance of his bid, he shall forfeit to the City as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security deposited with his bid. ' I13-7 PREPARATION OF BIDS Bids must be made upon the prescribed forms attached in these Contract Documents. Only sealed bids will be considered, all bids otherwise submitted will be rejected as irregular. ' All blank spaces in the bid must be filled in and no change shall be made in the phraseology of the bid, or addition to the items mentioned therein. Any conditions, limitations or provisions attached to bids will render them informal and may be considered cause for their rejection. Extensions of quantities and unit prices shall be carried out to the penny. IB-8 PRICES The price submitted for each item of the work shall include all costs of whatever nature involved in its construction, complete in place, as described in the Plans and Specifications. ' • Section 144.062 RSMo provides that the City's sales tax exemption may be used for the purchase of goods and materials for this project. The contract for the project will authorize and ' direct the Contractor to utilize the City's sales tax exemption in the purchase of goods and materials for the project. This provision shall apply to only those purchases totaling over$500 from an individual supplier. ' All sales taxes on those items which do not qualify for the use of the City's sales tax exemption and for which sales tax might lawfully be assessed against the City are to be paid by the Contractor from the monies obtained in satisfaction of the Contract. It being understood by the bidder, that the bid prices submitted for those items shall include the cost of such taxes. IB-9 APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES ' In cases where any part or all of the bidding is to be received on a unit price basis, the quantities stated in the bid will not be used in establishing final payment due the successful Contractor. The quantities stated on which unit prices are so invited are approximate only and each bidder shall make his own estimate from the plans of the quantities required on each item and calculate his unit price bid for each item accordingly. Bids will be compared on the basis ' of number of units stated in the bid. Such estimated quantities, while made from the best information available, are approximate only. Payment of the Contract will be based on actual number of units installed on the complete work. • ' IB-10 LUMP SUM ITEMS • Payment for each lump sum item shall be at the lump sum bid for the item, complete in place, ' and shall include the costs of all labor, materials, tools and equipment to construct the item as described herein and to the limits shown on the Plans. ' IB-11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS The Bid and the Bid Security guaranteeing the same shall be placed in a sealed envelope and marked "Project No. 63015, Bus Transfer Station 820 E. Miller". IB-12 ALTERNATE BIDS ' In making the award, if alternate bids have been requested, the alternate bid which will be in the best interest of the City will be used. ' IB-13 WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS ' If a bidder wishes to withdraw his bid, he may do so before the time fixed for the opening, without prejudice to himself. No bidder may withdraw his bid for a period of ninety (90) days after the scheduled closing time for the receipt of bids. ' No bids received after the time set for opening for bids will be considered. IB-14 RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive any informality in the bids received, or to accept the bid or bids that in its judgement will be in the best interests of the City of ' Jefferson. I113-15 AWARD OF CONTRACT ' If, within seven (7) days after he has received notice of acceptance of his bid, the successful bidder or bidders shall refuse or neglect to come to the office of the Director of Community Development and to execute the Contract and to furnish the required Performance and Payment Bonds and Insurance, properly signed by the Contractor and the Surety and Sureties satisfactory to the City of Jefferson as hereinafter provided, the bidder or bidders shall be ' deemed to be in default and shall forfeit the deposit. IB-16 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND A Performance and Payment Bond in an amount equivalent to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price, must be furnished and executed by the successful bidder or bidders. A form for the bidders use is contained in these Contract Documents. The issuing Surety shall be a corporate Surety Company or companies of recognized standing licensed to do business in the State of Missouri and acceptable to the City of Jefferson. • IB-17 INDEMNIFICATION AND INSURANCE • The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the City from all claims and suits for loss 1 of or damage to property, including loss of all judgments recovered therefore, and from all expense in defending said claims, or suits, including court costs, attorney fees and other expense caused by any act or omission of the Contractor and/or his subcontractors, their ' respective agents, servants or employees. The Contractor shall be required to provide the City of Jefferson with a Certificate of Insurance outlining the coverage provided. IB-18 BID SECURITY RETURNED TO SUCCESSFUL BIDDER ' Upon the execution of the Contract and approval of Bond, the Bid Security will be returned to the bidder unless the same shall have been presented for collection prior to such time, in which ' case the amount of the deposit will be refunded by the City. IB-19 NONDISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT Contracts for work under this bid will obligate the Contractor and subcontractors not to discriminate in employment practices. IB-20 PREVAILING WAGE LAW The principal contractor and all subcontractors shall pay not less than the prevailing wage • hourly rate for each craft or type of workman required to execute this contract as determined by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations of Missouri, pursuant to Sections 290.210 through 290.340 inclusive of the Revised Statutes of Missouri, 1994 as amended. (See ' Determination included herewith.) IB-21 GUARANTEE ' The Contractor shall guarantee that the equipment, materials and workmanship furnished under this contract will be as specified and will be free from defects for a period of one year ' from the date of final acceptance. In addition,the equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in design. Within the guarantee period and upon notification of the Contractor by the City, the Contractor shall promptly make all needed adjustments, repairs or replacements arising out of defects which, in the judgment of the City become necessary during such period. The cost of all materials, parts, labor, transportation, supervision, special tools, and supplies required for replacement of parts, repair of parts or correction of abnormalities shall be paid by the Contractor or by his surety under the terms of the Bond. The Contractor also extends the terms of this guarantee to cover repaired parts and all replacement parts furnished under the guarantee provisions for a period of one year from the date of installation thereof. • r ' If within ten days after the City gives the Contractor notice of defect, failure, or abnormality of • the work, the Contractor neglects to make, or undertake with due diligence to make, the ' necessary repairs or adjustments, the City is hereby authorized to make the repairs or adjustments itself or order the work to be done by a third party, the costs of the work to be paid by the Contractor. In the event of an emergency where, in the judgment of the City delays would cause serious loss or damage, repairs or adjustments may be made by the City or a third party chosen by the ' City without giving notice to the Contractor, and the cost of the work shall be paid by the Contractor or by his surety under the terms of the Bond. IB-22 NOTICE TO PROCEED A written notice to begin construction work will be given to the Contractor by the City of Jefferson within ten (10)days after the Contract is approved by the City Council. The time for ' completion of the project shall begin to run on the date established in this notice. IB-23 WORK SCHEDULE To insure that the work will proceed continuously through the succeeding operations to its completion with the least possible interference to traffic and inconvenience to the public, the ' Contractor shall, at the request of the City, submit for approval a complete schedule of his proposed construction procedure,stating the sequence in which various operations of work are to be performed. ' • IB-24 CONTRACT TIME ' The contract time shall be 90 calendar days. IB-25 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ' Liquidated damages shall be assessed at the rate of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per calendar day until the work is complete, should the project not be completed within the contract time. IB-26 POWER OF ATTORNEY ' Attorneys-in-fact who sign bid bonds or contract bonds must file with each bond a certified and effectively dated copy of their power of attorney. ' IB-27 BID PACKET Each bid must be submitted on the prescribed forms and contain certain certifications and ' documentation. Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the bidder, the bidder's address, and the name of the project for which the bid is being submitted. If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing the bid must be enclosed in another • envelope addressed as follows: ' Purchasing Agent • City of Jefferson, MO ' 320 E. McCarty Street Jefferson City, MO 65101 For the convenience of bidding this project, a "BID PACKET" has been included with the ' project manual. This packet contains the necessary forms to be submitted with the bid proposal. The contents of this packet include the following: 1) BID FORM 2) BID BOND 3) ANTI-COLLUSION STATEMENT ' 4) CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT 5) MINORITY BUSINESS UTILIZATION AGREEMENT ' E F ND OF INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS 1 • i 1 • 1 1 BID FORM ' Name of United HRB General Contractors,, Inc. Address ofBidder PO Box 104444 Jefferson City, MO 65110-4444 ' To: CITY OF JEFFERSON 320 East McCarty Street Jefferson City, Missouri 65101 ' THE UNDERSIGNED BIDDER, having examined the cans,specifications, regulations a 9 P P 9 of the Contract, Special Conditions, other proposed contract documents and all iaddenda thereto; and being acquainted with and fully understanding (a)the extent and character of the work covered by this Bid; (b)the location,arrangement, and specified requirements for the proposed work; (c) the location, character, and condition of ' existing streets, roads, highways, railroads, pavements, .surfacing, walks, driveways, curbs, gutters, trees, sewers, utilities, drainage courses, structures, and other installations, both surface and underground which may:.affect or be affected by the ' proposed work; (d)the nature and extent of the excavations.to be made and the type, character, and general condition of materials to be excavated; (e) the necessary handling and rehandling of excavated materials;(f)the location and extent of necessary or probable dewatering requirements; (g)the difficulties and hazards to the work which might be caused by storm and flood water, (h) local conditions relative to labor, transportation, hauling,and rail delivery facilities;and(i)all otherfactors and conditions affecting or which may be affected by the work. HEREBY PROPOSED to furnish all required materials, supplies,equipment,tools,and ' plant; to perform all necessary labor and supervision; and to construct, install, erect, and complete all work stipulated, required by, and in accordance with the proposed contract documents and the drawings, specifications, and other documents referred to ' therein (as altered, amended, or modified by addenda) in the manner and time prescribed and that he will accept in full payment sums determined by applying to the quantities of the following items, the following unit prices and/or any lump sum payments provided, plus or minus any special payments and adjustments provided in the specifications and he understands that the estimated quantities herein given are not guaranteed-to be the exact or total quantities required for the completion of the work shown on the drawings and described in the specifications, and that increases or decreases may be made over or under the Contract estimated quantities to provide for ' needs-that are determined during progress of the work and that prices bid shall apply to such increased or decreased quantities as follows: • 1 Page 1 of 1. tCITY OF JEFFERSON ITEMIZED BID FORM ' BUS TRANSFER STATION 820 E. MILLER PROJECT NO. 63015 ' ITEM APPROX. UNIT NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY PRICE AMOUNT ' 1 Restroom Facility LS 1 43,271.00 43,271.00 2 Bus Shelter LS 1 48,000.00 48,000.00 ' TOTAL BASE BID 91,271.00 ' Signature of Bidder D to 1 1 • 1 SUBCONTRACTORS ' • If the Bidder intends to use_any subcontractors in the course of the construction, he shall list them. 1 TIME OF COMPLETION IThe undersigned hereby agrees to complete the project within 90 calendar days, subject to the stipulations of the regulations of the Contract and the Special Provisions. It is understood and agreed that if this bid is accepted, the prices quoted above include ' all applicable state taxes and that said taxes shall be paid by the Contractor. The undersigned, as Bidder, hereby declares that the only persons or firms interested in the bid as principal or principals is or are named herein and that no other persons or firms than herein mentioned have any interest in this bid or in the Contract to be entered into; and this bid is made without connection with any other person, company, ' or parties making a bid; and that it is in all respects fair and in good faith, without collusion or fraud. ' The undersigned agrees that the accompanying bid deposit shall become the property • of the Owner, should he fail or refuse to execute the Contract or furnish Bond as called for in the specifications within the time provided. ' If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered to the undersigned within sixty (60) days after the date of opening of bids, or any time ' thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days after the date of such mailing,telegraphing, or delivering of such notice, execute and deliver a Contract in the form of Contract attached. The undersigned hereby designates as his office to which such notice of acceptance may be mailed, telegraphed, or delivered: ' Elmer 0. Kiesling P.E. It is understood and agreed that this bid may be withdrawn at any time prior to the scheduled time for the opening of bids or any authorized postponement thereof. Attached hereto is a Bid Bond for the sum of 5% Bid Bond Dollars (cashier's check), make payable to the City of Jefferson. ' Signature of Bidder: If an individual, , doing business as ' If a partnership, , member of firm. by ' If corporation, United HRB General Contractors, Inc. by Title Elmer 0. Riesling, Vice Pres d=ent 1 SEAL 1 Business Address of Bidder PO Box 104444 Jefferson City, MO 65110-4444 ' If Bidder is a corporation, supply the following information: State in which incorporated Missouri ' Name and Address of its: President Roger Adrian ,. 3208 Route C Jefferson City, MO 65109 ' Secretary Jon Hartenstein 3208 Route C Jefferson City, MO 65109 ' Date July 22, 2008 11 • ANTI-COLLUSION STATEMENT i rSTATE OF Missouri ' COUNTY OF Cole Elmer 0. Riesling, P.E. being first 1 duly sworn, deposes and says that he is Vice President of ' TITLE OF PERSON SIGNING � United HRB General Contractors, Inc. NAME OF BIDDER that all statements made and facts set out in the bid for the above project are true and ' correct; and that the bidder(the person, firm, association, or corporation making said bid)has not, either directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement,.participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with such bid of any contract which result from its acceptance. Affiant further certifies that bidder is not financially interested in, or financially affiliated ' • with, any other bidder for the above project. (BY) ' (BY) Sworn to before me this 22nd day of July 7200s . 1 DENISE CALEY NOTARY PUBLI Notary Public I Notary Seal State of Missouri Cole County My Commission Expues 6/1/2012 Commission#08057995 My commission expires: 1 • ' CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT " i This affidavit is hereby made a. part of the Bid., and an executed copy thereof shall accompany each Bid submitted. STATE OF Missouri ) Cole ) ss COUNTY OF ) The undersigned, Elmer 0. Kiesling, P.E. of lawful age, being first duly sworn states upon oath that he is Vice-_President of United HRB General Contractors, Inc. ' the contractor submitting the attached bid, that he knows of his own knowledge and states it to be a fact that neither said bid nor the computation upon which it is based . include any amount of monies, estimate or allowance representing wages, moneys or expenses, however designated, proposed to be paid to persons who are not required to furnish material or actually perform services upon or as a part of the proposed ' project. ' T AF I F Subscribed and sworn to before me, a Notary Public, in and for the County and State aforesaid, this 22nd day of July , 2008 l DENISE CAIZY NOTARY PUB I Notary Public/Notary Seal State of Missouri Cole county My Commission Expires 6/1/2012 My Commission Expires: Commission# 7995 • 1 I ' MINORITY BUSINESS UTILIZATION AGREEMENT A. The bidder agrees to attempt to expend at least two (3.2) % of the contract, if awarded,for Minority Business Enterprise(MBE). For purposes of this goal,the ' term "Minority Business Enterprise" shall mean a business:.' 1. Which is at least 51 percent owned by one or more minorities or women, ' or, in the case of a publicly owned business, at least 51 percent of the stock of which is owned by one or more minorities or women; and 1 2. Whose management and daily business operations arecontrolled by one or more such individuals. 1 "Minority Group Member"or"Minority" means a person who is.a citizen or lawful permanent resident of the United States, and who is: ' 1. Black(a person having origins in any of the black racial groups of Africa); 2. Hispanic (a person of Spanish or Portuguese culture with. origins in ' Mexico, South or Central America,or the Caribbean Island, regardless of race); ' 3. Asian American(a person having origins in any of the original peoples of • the Far East, Southeast Asia, the Indian sub-continent, or the Pacific Islands); 4. American Indians and Alaskan Native (a person having origins in any of the original peoples of North America); 5. Member of.other groups, or other individuals, found to be economical) 9 P � Y and socially disadvantaged by the Small Business Administration under Section 8(a) of the Small Business Act, as amended [15 U.S.C. 637(a)]. .6. A female person who requests to be considered as an MBE, and who ' "owns" and "controls" a business as defined herein. Minority Business Enterprises may be employed as contractors,subcontractors, or suppliers. 1 • ' B. The bidder must indicate the Minority Business Enterprise(s) proposed for utilization as part of this contract as follows: • ' Name and Addresses Nature of Dollar Value of of Minority Firms Participation Participation 1 Total Bid Amount: Total: Percentage of Minority Enterprise Participation: % C. The bidder agrees to certify that the minority firm(s) engaged to provide materials or services in the completion of this project: (a) is a bona fide Minority Business Enterprise; and(b)has executed a binding contract to provide specific materials or services for a specific dollar amount. A roster of bona fide Minority Business Enterprise firms will be fumished by the City of Jefferson. The bidder will provide written notice to the Liaison Officer of ' the City of Jefferson indicating the Minority Business Enterprise(s) it intends to use in conjunction with this contract. This written notice is due five days after notification to the lowest bidder. Certification that the Minority Business Enterprise(s) has executed a binding contract with the bidder for materials or services should be provided to the MBE Coordinator at the time the bidder's contract is submitted to the MBE Coordinator. D. The undersigned hereby certified that he or she has read the terms of this agreement and is authorized to bind the bidder to the agreement herein set forth. Elmer 0. Kiesling, P.B. NAME OF AUTHORIZED OFFICER DATE07/22/08 ell SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZEfn OFFICER • 1 • BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that we the undersigned, United HRB General Contractors, Inc_ __Yas Principal, and Safeco Insurance Company of America as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI , as owner,. in the penal sum of Five Percent of Amount Bid (5%) for the payment of which; well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, this 22nd day of July ' 2008 / The condition of.the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI a certain Bid, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a contract in writing, for the project entitled: "Project No. 63015, Bus Transfer Station 820 E. Miller" NOW, THEREFORE, ' (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, ' (b)' if said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the Form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said Bid)and shall furnish a bond for his faithful performance ' of said contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or • furnishing materials in connection therewith, shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being I expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. The Surety,for value received,hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall be. in no way impaired or affected by the extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid; and said.Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals,and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers,the day and year first set forth above. United HRB General Contractors, Inc. (L.S.) Principal By. SEAL Safeco 1nsQuFan� &*a��Fbf erica sure ty 1 • Kris . Bennett, Attorney-in-Fact S A F E C O' SAFECO Insurance Company PO Box 34526 ' Seattle,WA 98124-1526 ' ACKNOWLEDGMENT BY SURETY STATE OF Missouri County of Cole ss. On this 22nd day of July 2008 , before me personally appeared Kris L. Bennett , known to, me,t�o be the Attorney-in-Fact of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA or SAFECO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY the corporation that executed the within instrument,and acknowledged to me that such corporation executed the same. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal,at my office in the aforesaid County,the day and ' year in this certificate first above written. N Public in the State o -Missouri • (Seal) Co ty of Cole ' JESSICA ANDREWS NOTARY PUBLIC-NOTARY SEAL STATE OF MISSOURI COLE COUNTY ' COMMSSION#07055529 MY COMMISSION EXPIRES:6/3/2011 r ' 5-0230/SAFE 10099 ®A registered trademark of SAFECO Corporation FRP. t ' Safeco Insurance Company of America POWER General insurance Company of America a. Safe.Plaza OF ATTORNEY Seattle,WA 98185.; ' No. 5462 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, each a Washington corporation,does each hereby appoint ESSICA ANDREWS;KRIS L BENNETT;LOUIS A.LANDWEHR;CHARLES E TRABUE;Jefferson City,Missouri"."""*"' i its true and lawful attomey(s�in-fact,with full authority to execute on its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character issued in the course of its business,and to bind the respective company thereby. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMIVAICA have each executed and attested these presents this 15th day of July 2008 ' STEPHANIE DALEY-WATSON.SECRETARY TIM MIKOLAJEWSKI,SENIOR VICE-PRESIDENT,SURETY CERTIFICATE Extract from the By-Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA ' and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: "Article V,Section 13.-FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS...the President,any Vice President,the Secretary,and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations,shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attomeys-in-fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and • other documents of similar character issued by the company in the course of its business...On any instrument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or.on any bond or undertaking of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided,however,that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking." ' Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28,1970. "On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out (i) The provisions of Article V,Section 13 of the By-Laws,and A copy of the power-of-attomey appointment,executed pursuant thereto,and (iii) Certifying that said power-of-attomey appointment is in full force and effect, the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile,and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof." I,Stephanie Daley-Watson Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE ' COMPANY OF AMERICA,do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By-Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of these corporations,and of a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto,are true and correct,and that both the By-Laws,the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect.. ' IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation this 22nd day of July 2008 SEAL ME SEAL X l 3 let's� � STEPHANIE DALEY-WATSON,SECRETARY Of SafecoO and the Safeco logo are registered trademarks of Safeco Corporation. • S-09741DS 4/05 WEB PDF ISafeco Insurance Companies • • Safeco Playa ISeattle,WA 98185 i ' IMPORTANT SURETY BOND INFORMATION MISSOURI ' Your Safeco agent is a professional independent Insurance Agent. If you have specific questions about your Surety Bond,you may direct them to your agent. " ' MISSOURI SPECIFIC QUESTIONS If you have been unable to contact or obtain information from your agent, you may contact ' Safeco at the following address and telephone: AMERICAN STATES INSURANCE COMPANY SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA ' GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA Safeco Plaza,Suite 1700 ' • Seattle,WA 98185-0001 Mailing Address: P.O.Box 34526 Seattle,WA 98124 Telephone#206-473-3799 • S-36551SA 012007 Safeco and the Safeco Logo are registered trademarks of Safeco Corporation XDP 1 • Missouri Division of Labor Standards ' WAGE A E AND HOUR SECTION Ri by U ZV O� Mocccxx ' MATT BLUNT, Governor Annual Wage Order No. 15 1 Section 026 ' COLE COUNTY In accordance with Section 290.262 RSMo 2000, within thirty (30) days after a certified copy of this ' Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of State as indicated below, any person who may be affected by this Annual Wage Order may object by filing an objection in triplicate with the Labor and Industrial Relations Commission, P.O. Box 599, Jefferson City, MO 65102-0599. Such objections must set forth in writing the specific grounds of objection. Each objection shall certify that a copy has been furnished to the Division of Labor Standards, P.O. Box 449, Jefferson City, MO 65102-0449 pursuant to 8 CSR 20-5.010(1). A certified copy of the Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of State of Missouri. Original Signed by Paul Buckley,Director Division of Labor Standards This Is A True And Accurate dopy Which Was Filed With The Secretary of State: March 10,2008 1 Last Date Objections May Be Filed: April 9,2008 • Prepared by Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations Building Construction Rates for REPLACEMENT PAGE Section 026 ' COLE County "Effective Basic Over- OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits Increase Rates Schedule Schedule Asbestos Worker $27.24 55 60 $14.61 ' Boilermaker $31.10 57 7 $18.90 Bricklayers-Stone Mason $26.98 59 7 1 $11.20 Carpenter $23.23 60 15 $9.96 Cement Mason $22.34 9 3 $10.09 , Electrician Inside Wireman $28.18 28 7 $10.96+ 13% Communication Technician USE ELECTRICIAN INSIDE WIREMAN RATE Elevator Constructor a $38.715 26 54 $17.675 Operating Engineer , Group 1 5/08 $25.52 86 66 $17.35 -Group II 5/08 $25.52 86 66 $17.35 -Group III 5/08 $24.27 86 66 $17.35 ' Group III-A 5/08 $25.52 86 66 1 $17.35 -Group IV 5/08 $23.29 86 66 $17.35 Group V 5/08 $26.22 86 66 $17.35 Pipe Fitter b $32.25 91 69 $19.18 , Glazier $15.00 FED $1.85 Laborer(Building): General $18.92 110 7 1 $9.43 First Semi-Skilled $20.92 110 7 $9.43 , Second Semi-Skilled 1 $19.92 110 7 $9.43 Lather JUSE CARPENTER RATE Linoleum Layer&Cutter USE CARPENTER RATE ' Marble Mason $26.98 59 7 $11.20 Millwright $24.23 60 15 $9.96 Iron Worker $24.65 11 8 $15.87 Painter $20.40 18 7 $8.77 ' Plasterer 1 $21.36 94 5 $9.88 Plumber $22.50 FED $3.49 Pile Driver $24.23 60 15 $9.96 Roofer $25.75 12 4 $10.69 , Sheet Metal Worker $26.12 40 23 $11.93 Sprinkler Fitter $16.50 FED $2.60 Terrazzo Worker 1 $26.98 59 1 7 $11.20 Tile Setter $26.98 59 7 $11.20 ' Truck Driver-Teamster -Group 1 3/08 $22.00 101 5 $8.30 Group II 3/08 $22.70 101 5 1 $8.30 ' -Group III 1 3/08 $22.40 101 5 $8.30 Group IV 3/08 $22.70 101 5 $8.30 Traffic Control Service Driver- Welders-Acetylene&Electric , Fringe Benefit Percentage is of the Basic Hourly Rate Attention Workers: If you are not being paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits contact the Division ' of Labor Standards at(573)751-3403. "Annual Incremental Increase ' • 'SEE FOOTNOTE PAGE ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 15 6/08 Building Construction Rates for Section 026 COLE County Footnotes ' Effective Basic Over- OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits Increase Rates Schedule Schedule 1 Welders receive rate prescribed for the occupational title performing operation to which welding is incidental. Use Building Construction Rates on Building(s)and All Immediate Attachments.Use Heavy Construction ' rates for remainder of project. For the occupational titles not listed in Heavy Construction Sheets,use Rates shown on Building Construction Rate Sheet. a-Vacation: Employees over 5 years-8%; Employees under 5 years-6% ' b- All work over$7 Million Total Mechanical Contract-$32.25,Fringes-$19.18 All work under$7 Million Total Mechanical Contract-$30.91,Fringes-$14.65 • ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO.15 3/08 i COLE COUNTY , OVERTIME SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION FED: Minimum requirement per Fair Labor Standards Act means time and one-half(1 %2)shall be paid for all work in excess of forty(40)hours per work week. , NO.9: Means the regular workday starting time of 8:00 a.m.(and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.)may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m. or delayed one hour to 9:00 a.m. All work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated at one and one-half(1'/2) times the regular pay. In the event time is lost during the work week due to weather conditions,the Employer may schedule work on the following Saturday at straight time. All work accomplished on Sunday and holidays shall be compensated for at double the regular rate of wages. The work week shall be Monday through Friday,except for midweek holidays. , NO. 11: Means eight(8)hours shall constitute a day's work,with the starting time to be established between 6:00 a.m. and 8:00 a.m.from Monday to Friday. Time and one-half(1%2)shall be paid for first two(2)hours of overtime Monday through Friday and the first eight(8)hours on Saturday. All other overtime hours Monday through Saturday shall be paid at double (2)time rate. , Double(2)time shall be paid for all time on Sunday and recognized holidays or the days observed in lieu of these holidays. NO. 12: Means the work week shall commence on Monday at 12:01 a.m. and shall continue through the following Friday, , inclusive of each week. All work performed by employees anywhere in excess of forty(40)hours in one(1)work week,shall be paid for at the rate of one and one-half(1'/2)times the regular hourly wage scale. All work performed within the regular working hours which shall consist of a ten(10)hour work day except in emergency situations. Overtime work and Saturday work shall be paid at one and one-half(1'/2)times the regular hourly rate. Work on recognized holidays and Sundays shall be paid at two(2) , times the regular hourly rate. NO.18: Means the regular work day shall be eight(8)hours. Working hours are from six(6)hours before Noon(12:00)to six (6)hours after Noon(12:00). The regular work week shall be forty(40)hours,beginning between 6:00 a.m.and 12:00 Noon on ' Monday and ending between 1:00 p.m. and 6:0d p.m.on Friday. Saturday will be paid at time and one-half(1%2). Sunday and Holidays shall be paid at double(2)time. Saturday can be a make-up day if the weather has forced a day off,but only in the week of the day being lost. Any time before six(6)hours before Noon or six(6)hours after Noon will be paid at time and one-half ' (1'/2). i NO.26: Means that the regular working day shall consist of eight(8)hours worked between 6:00 a.m.,and 5:00 p.m., five(5) days per week,Monday to Friday,inclusive.Hours of work at each jobsite shall be those established by the general contractor and ' worked by the majority of trades. (The above working hours may be changed by mutual agreement). Work performed on Construction Work on Saturdays, Sundays and before and after the regular working day on Monday to Friday,inclusive,shall be classified as overtime,and paid for at double(2)the rate of single time. The employer may establish hours worked on a jobsite for a four(4)ten(10)hour day work week at straight time pay for construction work;the regular working day shall consist of ten(10) , hours worked consecutively,between 6:00 a.m.and 6:00 p.m.,four(4)days per week,Monday to Thursday,inclusive. Any work performed on Friday,Saturday,Sunday and holidays,and before and after the regular working day on Monday to Thursday where a four(4)ten(10)hour day workweek has been established,will be paid at two times(2)the single time rate of pay. The rate of pay for all work performed on holidays shall be at two times(2)the single time rate of pay. • ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO.15 , Awl 026 OT.doc Page 1 of 4 Pages ' COLE COUNTY OVERTIME SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION NO. 28: Means a regular workday shall consist of eight(8)hours between 7:00 a.m. and 5:30 p.m., with at least a thirty(30) ' minute period to be taken for lunch. Five(5)days a week,Monday through Friday inclusive,shall constitute a work week. The Employer has the option for a workday/workweek of four(4)ten(10)hour days(4-10's)provided: ' -The project must be for a minimum of four(4)consecutive days. -Starting time may be within one(1)hour either side of 8:00 a.m. -Work week must begin on either a Monday or Tuesday: If a holiday falls within that week it shall be a consecutive work day. (Alternate: If a holiday falls in the middle of a week, then the regular eight (8) hour schedule may be implemented). -Any time worked in excess of any ten(10)hour work day(in a 4-10 hour work week)shall be at the appropriate overtime rate. ' All work outside of the regular working hours as provided,Monday through Saturday,shall be paid at one&one-half(1%2)times the employee's regular rate of pay. All work performed from 12:00 a.m.Sunday through 8:00 a.m. Monday and recognized holidays shall be paid at double(2)the straight time hourly rate of pay. Should employees work in excess of twelve(12) ' consecutive hours they shall be paid double time(2X)for all time after twelve(12)hours. Shift work performed between the hours of 4:30 p.m.and 12:30 a.m.(second shift)shall receive eight(8)hours pay at the regular hourly rate of pay plus ten(10%) percent for seven and one-half(7%2)hours work. Shift work performed between the hours of 12:30 a.m.and 8:00 a.m.(third shift) shall receive eight(8)hours pay at the regular hourly rate of pay plus fifteen(15%)percent for seven(7)hours work. A lunch ' period of thirty(30)minutes shall be allowed on each shift. All overtime work required after the completion of a regular shift shall be paid at one and one-half(1'/2)times the shift hourly rate. NO.40: Means the regular working week shall consist of five(5)consecutive(8)hour days'labor on the job beginning with ' Monday and ending with Friday of each week. Four(4)10-hour days may constitute the regular work week. The regular working day shall consist of eight(8)hours labor on the job beginning as early as 7:00 a.m.and ending as late as 5:30 p.m. All full or part time labor performed during such hours shall be recognized as regular working hours and paid for at the regular hourly rate. All ' hours worked on Saturday and all hours worked in excess of eight(8)hours but not more than twelve(12)hours during the regular working week shall be paid for at time and one-half(1%2)the regular hourly rate. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays and all hours worked in excess of twelve(12)hours during the regular working day shall be paid at two(2)times the regular hourly rate. In the event of rain,snow,cold or excessively windy weather on a regular working day,Saturday may be ' designated as a"make-up"day. Saturday may also be designated as a"make-up"day,for an employee who has missed a day of work for personal or other reasons. Pay for"make-up"days shall be at regular rates. NO.55: Means the regular work day shall be eight(8)hours between 6:00 a.m.and 4:30 p.m. The first two(2)hours of work ' performed in excess of the eight(8)hour work day, Monday through Friday,and the first ten(10) hours of work on Saturday, shall be paid at one&one-half(1'/2)times the straight time rate. All work performed on Sunday,observed holidays and in excess of ten(10)hours a day,Monday through Saturday,shall be paid at double(2)the straight time rate. ' NO.57: Means eight(8)hours per day shall constitute a day's work and forty(40)hours per week,Monday through Friday,shall constitute a week's work. The regular starting time shall be 8:00 a.m. The above may be changed by mutual consent of authorized personnel. When circumstances warrant,the Employer may change the regular workweek to four(4)ten-hour days at ' the regular time rate of pay. It being understood that all other pertinent information must be adjusted accordingly. All time worked before and after the established workday of eight(8)hours,Monday through Friday,all time worked on Saturday,shall be paid at the rate of time and one-half(1'/2) except in cases where work is part of an employee's regular Friday shift. All time worked on Sunday and recognized holidays shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. • ' ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO.15 Awl 5 026 OT.doc Page 2 of 4 Pages COLE COUNTY , OVERTMIE SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION NO.59: Means that except as herein provided,eight(8)hours a day shall constitute a standard work day,and forty(40)hours per week shall constitute a week's work. All time worked outside of the standard eight(8)hour work day and on Saturday shall be , classified as overtime and paid the rate of time and one-half(1%2). All time worked on Sunday and holidays shall be classified as overtime and paid at the rate of double(2)time. The Employer has the option of working either five(5)eight hour days or four (4) ten hour days to constitute a normal forty (40) hour work week. When the four (4) ten-hour work week is in effect, the ' standard work day shall be consecutive ten(10)hour periods between the hours of 6:30 a.m.and 6:30 p.m. Forty(40)hours per week shall constitute a weeks work,Monday through Thursday,inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control,then Friday and/or Saturday may,at the option of the Employer,be worked as a make-up day;straight time not to exceed ten(10)hours or forty(40)hours per week. When the five day(8)hour work week is in effect, forty(40)hours per , week shall constitute a week's work,Monday through Friday,inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control,then Saturday may,at the option of the Employer,be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed eight(8)hours or forty(40)hours per week. The regular starting time(and resulting quitting time)may be moved to 6:00 a.m.or ' delayed to 9:00 a.m. Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost due to holidays. NO.60: Means the Employer shall have the option of working five 8-hour days or four 10-hour days Monday through Friday. If an Employer elects to work five 8-hour days during any work week,hours worked more than eight(8)per day or forty(40)per , week shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/z)the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits Monday through Friday. SATURDAY MAKE-UP DAY: If an Employer is prevented from working forty(40)hours, Monday through Friday, or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather(rain or mud),Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. It is agreed by the parties that the make-up day is not to be used to make up time lost due to recognized holidays. If an Employer , elects to work four 10-hour days,between the hours of 6:30 a.m.and 6:30 p.m.in any week,work performed more than ten(10) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week shall be paid at time and one half(1%2) the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits Monday through Friday. If an Employer is working 10-hour days and loses a day due to inclement weather,the Employer may work ten(10)hours on Friday at straight time. Friday must be scheduled for no more than ten(10)hours at the straight time rate, ' but all hours worked over the forty(40)hours Monday through Friday will be paid at time and one-half(1'/z)the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits. All Millwright work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated for at time and one-half (1'/2)the regular Millwright hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits. The regular work day starting of 8:00 a.m. ' (and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.) may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m. or delayed one(1) hour to 9:00 a.m. All work • accomplished on Sundays and recognized holidays,or days observed as recognized holidays, shall be compensated for at double (2) the regular hourly rate of wages plus fringe benefits. NOTE: All overtime is computed on the hourly wage rate plus an amount equal to the fringe benefits. ' NO.86: Means the regular work week shall consist of five(5)days,Monday through Friday,beginning at 8:00 a.m.and ending at 4:30 p.m. The regular work day beginning time may be advanced one or two hours or delayed by one hour. However, the Employer may have the option to schedule his work week from Monday through Thursday at ten(10)hours per day at the straight , time rate of pay with all hours in excess of ten(10)hours in any one day to be at the applicable overtime rate. If the Employer elects to work from Monday through Thursday and is stopped due to circumstances beyond his control, inclement weather or holiday,he shall have the option to work Friday at the straight time rate of pay to complete his forty(40)hours. If an employee ' declines to work Friday as a make-up day,he shall not be penalized.All overtime work performed on Monday through Saturday shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/2)of the hourly rate plus an amount equal to one-half('/2)of the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits. All work performed on Sundays and recognized holidays shall be paid at double(2)the hourly rate plus an amount equal to the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits. ' NO.91:Means eight(8)hours shall constitute a day's work commencing at 8:00 a.m.and ending at 4:30 p.m.,allowing one-half (%2)hour for lunch. The option exists for the Employer to use a flexible starting time between the hours of 6:00 a.m.and 9:00 a.m. The regular workweek shall consist of forty(40)hours of five(5)workdays,Monday through Friday. The workweek may consist , of four(4)ten(10)hour days from Monday through Thursday,with Friday as a make-up day. If the make-up day is a holiday,the employee shall be paid at the double(2)time rate. The employees shall be paid time and one-half(1'/2)for work performed before the regular starting time or after the regular quitting time or over eight(8)hours per work day (unless working a 10-hour work day, then time and one-half(1'/z)is paid for work performed over ten(10)hours a day)or over forty(40)hours per work week. Work performed on Saturdays,Sundays and recognized holidays shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. • ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO.15 ' Awl 026 OT.doc Page 3 of 4 Pages COLE COUNTY OVERTMIE SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION NO.94: Means eight(8)hours shall constitute a days work between the hours of 8:00 a.m.and 5:00 p.m. The regular workday starting time of 8:00 a.m.(and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.)may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m.or delayed one(1)hour to 9:00 a.m. All work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated at one and one-half(1'/2) times the regular pay. In the event time is lost during the work week due to weather conditions,the Employer may schedule work ' on the following Saturday at straight time. All work accomplished on Sunday and holidays shall be compensated at double the regular rate of wages. NO.101: Means that except as provided below,eight(8)hours a day shall constitute a standard work day,and forty(40)hours per ' week shall constitute a week's work,which shall begin on Monday and end on Friday. All time worked outside of the standard work day and on Saturday shall be classified as overtime and paid the rate of time and one-half(1%2)(except as herein provided). All time worked on Sunday and recognized holidays shall be classified as overtime and paid at the rate of double(2)time. The regular starting time of 8:00 a.m.(and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.)may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m.or delayed one(1)hour to ' 9:00 a.m. The Employer has the option of working either five(5)eight-hour days or four(4)ten-hour days to constitute a normal forty(40)hour work week. When a four(4)ten-hour day work week is in effect,the standard work day shall be consecutive ten (10)hour periods between the hours of 6:30 a.m.and 6:30 p.m. Forty(40)hours per week shall constitute a week's work Monday through Thursday,inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control,then Friday and/or Saturday may, at the option of the Employer,be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed ten(10)hours per day or forty(40) hours per week. Starting time will be designated by the employer. When the five(5)day eight(8)hour work week is in effect,forty (40)hours per week shall constitute a week's work,Monday through Friday,inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control,then Saturday may,at the option of the Employer,be worked as a make-up day;straight time not to exceed eight(8)hours per day or forty(40)hours per week. Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost due to holidays. NO.110: Means eight(8)hours between the hours of 8:00 a.m.and 4:30 p.m.shall constitute a work day. The starting time may be advanced one(1)or two(2)hours. Employees shall have a lunch period of thirty(30)minutes. The Employer may provide a lunch period of one(1)hour,and in that event, the workday shall commence at 8:00 a.m. and end at 5:00 p.m. The workweek shall commence at 8:00 a.m. on Monday and shall end at 4:30 p.m. on Friday(or 5:00 p.m. on Friday if the Employer grants a lunch period of one(1)hour),or as adjusted by starting time change as stated above. All work performed before 8:00 a.m.and • after 4:30 p.m.(or 5:00 p.m.where one(1)hour lunch is granted for lunch)or as adjusted by starting time change as stated above or on Saturday,except as herein provided,shall be compensated at one and one-half(1%2)times the regular hourly rate of pay for the work performed. All work performed on Sunday and on recognized holidays shall be compensated at double(2)the regular ' hourly rate of pay for the work performed. If an Employer is prevented from working forty(40)hours,Monday through Friday,or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather(rain and mud),Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. The Employer shall have the option of working five eight(8)hour days or four ten(10)hour days Monday through Friday. If an Employer elects to work five(5)eight(8)hour days during any work week,hours worked more than eight ' (8)per day or forty(40)hours per week shall be paid at time and one-half(1%)the hourly rate Monday through Friday. If an Employer elects to work four(4)ten(10)hour days in any week,work performed more than ten(10)hours per day or forty(40) hours per week shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/2)the hourly rate Monday through Friday. If an Employer is working ten(10) hour days and loses a day due to inclement weather, they may work ten (10) hours Friday at straight time. Friday must be scheduled for at least eight(8)hours and no more than ten(10)hours at the straight time rate,but all hours worked over the forty (40)hours Monday through Friday will be paid at time and one-half(1'/2)overtime rate. • ' ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO.15 AW l5 026 OT.doc Page 4 of 4 Pages COLE COUNTY ' HOLIDAY SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION NO.3:All work done on New Year's Day,Decoration Day,July 4th,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. Whenever any such holidays fall on a Sunday,the following Monday shall be observed as a holiday. NO.4:All work done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Thanksgiving and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. If any of the above holidays fall on Sunday,Monday will be observed as the recognized holiday. If any of the above holidays fall on Saturday,Friday will be observed as the recognized holiday. NO.5: All work that shall be done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day, ' Thanksgiving Day,and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. NO.7:All work done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day, , and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. If a holiday falls on a Sunday,it shall be observed on the following Monday. If a holiday falls on a Saturday,it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. NO.8:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving ' Day,and Christmas Day,or the days observed in lieu of these holidays,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. NO.15:All work accomplished on the recognized holidays of New Year's Day,Decoration Day(Memorial Day),Independence Day(Fourth of July),Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day,or days observed as these named holidays,shall be compensated for at double(2)the regular hourly rate of wages plus fringe benefits. If a holiday falls on Saturday,it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. If a holiday falls on a Sunday,it shall be observed on the following Monday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day,Christmas Day,Decoration Day or Independence Day except to preserve ' life or property. NO.23:All work done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day and Sundays shall be recognized holidays and shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When a holiday falls • , on Sunday,the following Monday shall be considered a holiday. NO.54:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving ' Day,the Friday after Thanksgiving Day,and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. When a holiday falls on Saturday,it shall be observed on Friday. When a holiday falls on Sunday,it shall be observed on Monday. NO.60: All work performed on New Year's Day,Armistice Day(Veteran's Day),Decoration Day(Memorial Day), , Independence Day(Fourth of July),Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except when triple(3)time is paid. When a holiday falls on Saturday,Friday will be observed as the holiday. When a holiday falls on Sunday,the following Monday shall be observed as the holiday. ' NO.66: All work performed on Sundays and the following recognized holidays,or the days observed as such,of New Year's Day,Decoration Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day,shall be paid at double (2)the hourly rate plus an amount equal to the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits. Whenever any such holidays fall on a Sunday,the following Monday shall be observed as a holiday. NO.69: All work performed on New Year's Day,Decoration Day,July Fourth,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day or Christmas Day shall be compensated at double(2)their straight-time hourly rate of pay. Friday after Thanksgiving and the day before Christmas will also be holidays,but if the employer chooses to work these days,the employee will be paid at straight -time rate of pay. If a holiday falls on a Sunday in a particular year,the holiday will be observed on the following Monday. • ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 15 ' AW015026BHol.doc Page 1 of 1 Pages Building Construction Rates for REPLACEMENT PAGE Section 026 COLE County -Effective Basic Over- OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits Increase Rates Schedule Schedule Asbestos Worker $27.24 55 60 $14.61 Boilermaker $31.10 57 7 $18.90 Bricklayers-Stone Mason $26.98 59 7 1 $11.20 Carpenter $23.23 60 15 $9.96 Cement Mason $22.34 9 3 $10.09 Electrician inside Wireman $28.18 28 7 $10.96+ 13% Communication Technician USE ELECTRICIAN INSIDE WIREMAN RATE Elevator Constructor a $38.715 26 54 $17.675 Operating Engineer Group 1 5/08 $25.52 86 66 $17.35 Group II 5/08 $25.52 86 66 $17.35 1 Group III 5/08 $24.27 86 66 $17.35 Group III-A 5/08 $25.52 86 66 $17.35 Group IV 5/08 $23.29 86 66 $17.35 Group V 5/08 1 $26.22 86 66 $17.35 1 Pipe Fitter b $32.25 91 69 $19.18 Glazier $15.00 FED $1.85 Laborer(Building): General $18.92 110 7 $9.43 First Semi-Skilled $20.921 110 7 $9.43 Second Semi-Skilled $19.921 110 1 7 1 $9.43 Lather USE CARPENTER RATE Linoleum Layer&Cutter USE CARPENTER RATE ® Marble Mason $26.98 59 7 $11.20 Millwright $24.23 60 15 $9.96 Iron Worker $24.65 11 8 $15.87 Painter $20.40 18 7 $8.77 Plasterer $21.36 94 5 $9.88 Plumber $22.50 FED $3.49 Pile Driver $24.23 60 15 $9.96 1 Roofer $25.75 12 4 $10.69 Sheet Metal Worker $26.12 40 23 $11.93 Sprinkler Fitter $16.50 FED $2.60 Terrazzo Worker $26.98 59 7 $11.20 Tile Setter $26.98 59 7 $11.20 Truck Driver-Teamster -Group 1 3/08 1 $22.00 101 5 $8.30 Group II 3/08 $22.70 101 5 $8.30 Group III 3/08 $22.40 101 5 $8.30 Group IV 3/08 $22.70 101 5 $8.30 Traffic Control Service Driver 1 Welders-Acetylene&Electric ' Fringe Benefit Percentage is of the Basic Hourly Rate Attention Workers: If you are not being paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits contact the Division of Labor Standards at(573)751-3403. '`Annual Incremental Increase 'SEE FOOTNOTE PAGE ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO.15 6/08 COLE COUNTY , OVERTIME SCHEDULE—HEAVY CONSTRUCTION NO.2: Means a regular workweek shall be forty(40)hours and will start on Monday and end on Friday. The regular work day shall be either eight(8)or ten(10)hours. If a crew is prevented from working forty ' (40)hours Monday through Friday,or any part thereof,by reason of inclement weather, Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. Employees who are part of a regular crew on a make-up day,notwithstanding the fact that they may not have been employed the entire ' week,shall work Saturday at the straight time rate. A workday shift is to begin at the option of the Employer,between 6:00 a.m.and not later than 9:00 a.m. However,the project starting time may be advanced or delayed if required. If workmen are required to work the enumerated holidays or days ' observed as such or Sundays,they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. NO.7: Means the regular work week shall start on Monday and end on Friday,except where the Employer elects to work Monday through Thursday,ten(10)hours per day. All work over ten(10)hours , in a day or forty(40)hours in a week shall be at the overtime rate of one and one-half(1'/2)times the regular hourly rate. The regular workday shall be either eight(8)or ten(10)hours. If a job can't work forty(40)hours Monday through Friday because of inclement weather or other conditions beyond the ' control of the Employer,Friday or Saturday may be worked as a make-up day at straight time(if working 4-10's). Saturday maybe worked as a make-up day at straight time(if working 5-8's). Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost due to holidays. A workday is to begin at the option of the Employer but not later than 11:00 a.m. except when inclement weather,requirements of the owner or other ' conditions beyond the reasonable control of the Employer prevent work. Except as worked as a make-up day,time on Saturday shall be worked at one and one-half(1'/2)times the regular rate. Work performed on Sunday shall be paid at two(2)times the regular rate. Work performed on recognized holidays or days ' observed as such,shall also be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. NO. 21: Means the regular workday for which employees shall be compensated at straight time hourly ' rate of pay shall,unless otherwise provided for,begin at 8:00 a.m. and end at 4:30 p.m. However,the • project starting time may be advanced or delayed at the discretion of the Employer. At the discretion of the Employer,when working a five(5)day eight(8)hour schedule, Saturday may be used for a make-up day. If an Employer is prohibited from working on a holiday,that employer may work the following Saturday at the straight time rate. However,the Employer may have the option to schedule his work from Monday through Thursday at ten(10)hours per day at the straight time rate of pay with all hours in excess of ten(10)hours in any one day to be paid at the applicable overtime rate. If the Employer elects , to work from Monday through Thursday and is stopped due to circumstances beyond his control,he shall have the option to work Friday or Saturday at the straight time rate of pay to complete his forty(40) hours. If an Employer is prohibited from working on a holiday,that Employer may work the following Friday or Saturday at the straight time rate. Overtime will be at one and one-half(1%2)times the regular ' rate. If workmen are required to work the enumerated holidays or days observed as such,or Sundays, they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. NO.22: Means a regular work week of forty(40)hours will start on Monday and end on Friday. The ' regular work day shall be either eight(8)or ten(10)hours. If a crew is prevented from working forty (40)hours Monday through Friday,or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather,Saturday or any , part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. Employees who are part of a regular crew on a make-up day,notwithstanding the fact that they may not have been employed the entire week,shall work Saturday at the straight time rate. A workday is to begin between 6:00 a.m. and 9:00 a.m. However,the project starting time may be advanced or delayed if mutually agreed to by the , interested parties. For all time worked on recognized holidays,or days observed as such,double(2)time shall be paid. ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 15 ' AWO15 026 HOT.doc Page 1 of 1 Page 1 ' COLE COUNTY HOLIDAY SCHEDULE—HEAVY CONSTRUCTION . NO.4: All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Thanksgiving ' Day, Christmas Day,or days observed as such, shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When a holiday falls on a Sunday, Monday shall be observed. ' NO.5: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. If a holiday falls on a Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday.No work shall ' be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction. This rule is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week,Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight(8)hours toward a forty(40)hour week;however,no reimbursement for this eight(8) hours is ' to be paid the workman unless worked. If workmen are required to work the above recognized holidays or days observed as such, or Sundays, they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. The above shall apply to the four 10's Monday through Friday work week. The ten(10)hours shall be applied to the forty ' (40)hour work week. NO. 16: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Fourth of July, ' Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. If a holiday falls on Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday.No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction.This rule is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week,Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight(8)hours toward the forty(40)hour week;however, no reimbursement for this eight(8)hours is to be paid to the worker unless worked. If workers are required to work the above recognized holidays or days observed as such,they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. • NO. 19: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, ' Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction. This rule is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week, t Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight(8)hours toward the forty(40)hour week; however,no reimbursement for this eight(8)hours is to be paid the workmen unless worked. An Employer working a four (4) day, ten(10)hour schedule may use Friday as a make up day when an observed holiday occurs during the work week. Employees have the option to work that make up day. If workmen are required to work the above ' enumerated holidays, or days observed as such,they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. • AWO15 026 Mol.doc ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 15 Pagel of 1 Page OUTSIDE ELECTRICIAN • These rates are to be used for the following counties: ' Adair,Audrain,Boone,Callaway,Camden,Carter,Chariton,Clark,Cole,Cooper,Crawford,Dent,Franklin, Gasconade,Howard,Howell,Iron,Jefferson,Knox,Lewis,Lincoln,Linn,Macon,Maries,Marion,Miller,Moniteau, ' Monroe,Montgomery,Morgan,Oregon,Osage,Perry,Phelps,Pike,Pulaski,Putnam,Rails,Randolph,Reynolds, Ripley,St.Charles,St.Francois,St.Louis City,St.Louis County,Ste.Genevieve,Schuyler,Scotland,Shannon,Shelby, Sullivan,Texas,Warren,and Washington COMN[ERCIAL WORK ' Occupational Title Basic Total Hourly Fringe ' Rate Benefits Journeyman Lineman $32.38 $4.75+41.55% ' Lineman 2perator $27.96 $4.75+41.55% Groundman $21.62 $4.75+41.55% OVERTEME RATE:Eight(8)hours shall constitute a work day between the hours of 7:00 a.m.and 4:30 p.m.Forty t (40)hours within five(5)days,Monday through Friday inclusive,shall constitute the work week.Work performed in the 9th and 10th hour,Monday through Friday,shall be paid at time and one-half(1%z)the regular straight time rate of pay. Contractor has the option to pay two(2)hours per day at the time and one-half(1%2)the regular straight time rate of pay ' between the hours of 6:00 a.m.and 5:30 p.m.,Monday through Friday.Work performed outside the regularly scheduled working hours and on Saturdays,Sundays and recognized legal holidays,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid for at the rate of double(2)time. ' HOLIDAY RATE:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Fourth of duly,Labor Day,Veteran's Day, • Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When one of the foregoing holidays falls on Sunday,it shall be celebrated on the following Monday. ' UTILITY WORK Occupational Title Basic Total ' Hourly Fringe Rate Benefits- Joumeyman Lineman $32.38 $4.75+37.55% Lineman Opemtor $27.96 $4.75+37.55% ' Groundman $21.62 $4.75+37.55% OVERTIldE RATE:Eight(8)hours shall constitute a work day between the hours of 7:00 a.m.and 4:30 p.m.Forty (40)hours within five(5)days,Monday through Friday inclusive,shall constitute the work week.Work performed in the ' 9th and 10th hour,Monday through Friday,shall be paid at time and one-half(I%z)the regular straight time rate of pay. Contractor has the option to pay two(2)hours per day at the time and one-half(1'/z)the regular straight time rate of pay between the hours of 6:00 am.and 5:30 p.m.,Monday through Friday. Worked performed in the first eight(8)hours on ' Saturday shall be paid at the rate of one and eight tenths(1.8)the regular straight time rate. Work performed outside these hours and on Sundays and recognized legal holidays,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid for at the rate of double(2)time. HOLIDAY RATE:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day, ' Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When one of • the foregoing holidays falls on Sunday,it shall be celebrated on the following Monday. 1 ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 15 3/08 OVr SrLAWBADC 1 AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS LAW 1 I, the undersigned, , of lawful age, first ' being duly swom, state to the best of my information and belief as follows: ' 1. That I am employed as , by ' 2. That was awarded a public works contract for Project No. 63015, Bus Transfer Station 820 E. Miller. ' 3. That I have read and am familiar with Section 290.290 RSMo (1994 as amended)an act relating to public works contracts,which impose certain requirements upon contractors and subcontractors engaged in a public works construction project in the State of Missouri. ' 4. That has fully complied with the provisions and requirements of Section 290.290 RSMo (1994 as 1 • amended) ' FURTHER AFFIANT SAYETH NAUGHT. AFFIANT Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 ' NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: ' STATE OF MISSOURI ) ss COUNTY OF ) 1 • EXCESSIVE UNEMPLOYMENT EXCEPTION CERTIFICATION • ' I, the undersigned, , of lawful age, first being duly sworn, state to the best of my information and belief as follows: 1. That I am employed as by ' 2. That was awarded a public ' works contract for Project No. 63015, Bus Transfer Station 820 E. Miller. ' 3. That I have read and am familiar with Section 290.290 RSMo (1994 as amended)an act relating to public works contracts,which impose certain ' requirements upon contractors and subcontractors engaged in a public works construction project in the State of Missouri. ' 4. Although there is a period of excessive unemployment in the State of Missouri, which requires the employment of only Missouri laborers and ' laborers from non-restrictive states on public works projects or • improvements, an exception applies as to the hiring of ' since no Missouri laborers or laborers from non-restrictive states are available or capable ' of performing FURTHER AFFIANT SAYETH NAUGHT. ' AFFIANT ' Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 ' NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: APPROVED BY: ' Director of Community Development, City of Jefferson, MO • r ' CITY OF JEFFERSON • CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT ' THIS CONTRACT, made and entered into this 1q day of , 2008, by and between United HRB General Contractor, Inc. hereinaft r referred to as ' "Contractor", and the City of Jefferson, Missouri, a municipal corporation of the State of Missouri, hereinafter referred to as "City". WITNESSETH: That Whereas, the Contractor has become the lowest responsible bidder for furnishing the supervision, labor, tools, equipment, materials and supplies tand for constructing the following City improvements: Project No. 63015, Bus Transfer Station 820 E. Miller. ' NOW THEREFORE, the parties to this contract agree to the following: ' 1. Scope of Services. Contractor agrees to provide all labor, equipment, hardware and supplies to perform the work included in the project entitled "Bus Transfer Station 820 E. Miller" in ' accordance with the plans and specifications on file with the Department of Community Development. lie 2. Manner and time for Completion. Contractor agrees with the City to furnish all supervision, labor, tools, equipment, materials and supplies necessary to perform said work at Contractor's own expense in ' accordance with the contract documents and any applicable City ordinances and state and federal laws, within 90 calendar days from the date Contractor is ordered to proceed,which order shall be issued by the Director of Community Development within ' ten (10) days after the date of this contract. ' 3. Prevailing Wages. To the extent that the work performed by Contractor is subject to prevailing wage law, Contractor shall pay a wage of no less than the "prevailing hourly rate of wages" for ' work of a similar character in this locality, as established by Department of Labor and Industrial Relations of the State of Missouri, and as established by the Federal Employment Standards of the Department of Labor. Contractor acknowledges that Contractor knows the prevailing hourly rate of wages forthis project because Contractor has obtained the prevailing hourly rate of wages from the contents of the current ' Annual Wage Order No. 15, Section 026, Cole County rates as set forth. The Contractor further agrees that Contractor will keep an accurate record showing the names and occupations of all workmen employed in connection with the work to be ' performed under the terms of this contract. The record shall show the actual wages paid to the workmen in connection with the work to be performed under the terms of this contract. A copy of the record shall be delivered to the Purchasing Agent of the ' Jefferson City Finance Department each week. In accordance with Section 290.250 RSMo, Contractor shall forfeit to the City Ten Dollars ($10.00) for each workman employed, for each calendar day or portion thereof that the workman is paid less than 1 ' the an stipulated rates for work done under this contract, b the Contractor or any su • p Y Y subcontractor under the Contractor. ' 4. Insurance. Contractor shall procure and maintain at its own expense during the life of this contract: ' (a) . Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all of its employees to be engaged in work under this contract. ' b Contractor's Public Liability Insurance in an amount not less than O Y $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single occurrence and $300,000 for any one person in a single accident or occurrence, except for those claims governed by the provisions of the Missouri Workmen's Compensation Law, Chapter 287, RSMo., and Contractor's Property Damage Insurance in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all ' claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $300,000 for any one person in a single accident or occurrence. ' (c) Automobile Liability Insurance in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $300,000 for any one person in a single accident or occurrence. (d) Owner's Protective Liability Insurance -The Contractor shall also obtain ' at its own expense and deliver to the City an Owner's Protective Liability Insurance • Policy naming the City of Jefferson as the insured, in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $500,000 ' for anyone person in a single accident or occurrence, except forthose claims governed by the provisions of the Missouri Workmen's Compensation Law, Chapter 287, RSMo. No policy will be accepted which excludes liability for damage to underground ' structures or by reason of blasting, explosion or collapse. (e) Subcontracts- In case any or all of this work is sublet,the Contractor shall ' require the Subcontractor to procure and maintain all insurance required in Subparagraphs (a), (b), and (c) hereof and in like amounts. (f) Scope of Insurance and Special Hazard. The insurance required under Sub-paragraphs(b)and (c) hereof shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and its subcontractors, respectively, against damage claims which may arise from ' operations underthis contract,whether such operations be by the insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by it, and also against any special hazards which may be encountered in the performance of this contract. ' NOTE: Paragraph(f)is construed to require the procurement of Contractor's protective insurance (or contingent public liability and contingent property damage policies) by a ' general contractor whose subcontractor has employees working on the project, unless • the general public liability and property damage policy(or rider attached thereto)of the ' general contractor provides adequate protection against claims arising from operations by anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Contractor. 1 ' 5. Contractor's Responsibility for Subcontractors. • It is further agreed that Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the City for the acts ' and omissions of its subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as Contractor is for the acts and omissions of persons it directly employs. Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relating to this work, to bind all subcontractors to Contractor by all the terms herein set forth, insofar as applicable to the work of subcontractors and to give Contractor the same power regarding termination of any subcontract as the City may exercise over Contractor under any provisions of this contract. Nothing contained in this contract shall create any contractual relations between any subcontractor and the ' City or between any subcontractors. 6. Liquidated Damages. ' The City may deduct Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00)from any amount otherwise due under this contract for every day the Contractor fails or refuses to prosecute the work, or any separable part thereof, with such diligence as will insure the completion by the time above specified, or any extension thereof, or fails to complete the work by such ' time, as long as the City does not terminate the right of Contractor to proceed. It is further provided that Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages because of delays in the completion of the work due to unforeseeable causes beyond Contractor's control and without fault or negligence on Contractor's part or the part of its agents. ' • 7. Termination. The City reserves the right to terminate this contract by giving at least five (5)days prior written notice to Contractor, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the City should Contractor be adjudged a bankrupt, or if Contractor should make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed for ' Contractor or for any of its property, or if Contractor should persistently or repeatedly refuse or fail to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper material, or if Contractor should refuse or fail to make prompt payment to any person supplying labor ' or materials for the work under the contract, or persistently disregard instructions of the City or fail to observe or perform any provisions of the contract. ' 8. City's Right to Proceed. In the event this contract is terminated pursuant to Paragraph 7,then the City may take over the work and prosecute the same to completion, by contract or otherwise, and ' Contractor and its sureties shall be liable to the City for any costs over the amount of this contract thereby occasioned by the City. In any such case the City may take possession of, and utilize in completing the work, such materials, appliances and ' structures as may be on the work site and are necessary for completion of the work. The foregoing provisions are in addition to, and not in limitation of, the rights of the City under any other provisions of the contract, city ordinances, and state and federal laws. ' 9. Indemnity. v To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless ' the City, its elected and appointed officials, employees, and agents from and against any and all claims,damages, losses, and expenses including attorneys'fees arising out 1 ' of or resulting from the performance of the work, provided that any such claim,damage, • loss or expense (1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to ' injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself)including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of contractor,any subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by any ' of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this Paragraph. ' 10. Payment for Labor and Materials. The Contractor agrees and binds itself to pay for all labor done,and for all the materials used in the construction of the work to be completed pursuant to this contract. ' Contractor shall furnish to the City a bond to insure the payment of all materials and labor used in the performance of this contract. ' 11. Supplies. The Contractor is hereby authorized and directed to utilize the City's sales tax exemption in the purchase of goods and materials for the project as set out in Section ' 144.062 RSMo 1994 as amended. Contractor shall keep and maintain records and invoices of all such purchases which shall be submitted to the City. • 12. Payment. The City hereby agrees to pay the Contractor for the work done pursuant to this contract according to the payment schedule set forth in the Contract Documents upon ' acceptance of said work bythe Directorof Community Development and in accordance with the rates and/or amounts stated in the bid of Contractor dated August 8, 2008 which are by reference made a part hereof. No partial payment to the Contractor shall ' operate as approval or acceptance of work done or materials furnished hereunder. The total amount of this contract shall not exceed Ninety One Thousand Two Hundred ' Seventy One Dollars and Zero Cents ($91,271.00). 13. Performance and Materialman's Bonds Required. ' Contractor shall provide a bond to the City before work is commenced, and no later than ten (10) days after the execution of this contract, guaranteeing the Contractor's performance of the work bid for, the payment of amounts due to all suppliers of labor and materials, the payment of insurance premiums for workers compensation ' insurance and all other insurance called for under this contract, and the payment of the prevailing wage rate to all workmen as required by this contract, said bond to be in a ' form approved by the City, and to be given by such company or companies as may be acceptable to the City in its sole and absolute discretion. The amount of the bond shall be equal to the Contractor's bid. 1 1 1 14. Knowledge of Local Conditions. • Contractor hereby warrants that it has examined the location of the proposed work and ' the attached specifications and has fully considered such local conditions in making its bid herein. ' 15. Severability. If any section, subsection, sentence, or clause of this Contract shall be adjudged illegal,. tinvalid, or unenforceable, such illegality, invalidity, or unenforceability shall not affect the legality, validity, or enforceability of the contract as a whole, or of any section, subsection, sentence, clause, or attachment not so adjudged. ' 16. Governing Law. The contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Missouri. The courts of the State of Missouri shall have jurisdiction over any dispute which arises under this contract, and each of the parties shall submit and hereby consents to such courts ' exercise of jurisdiction. In any successful action by the City to enforce this contract, the City shall be entitled to recover its attorney's fees and expenses incurred in such action. ' 17. Contract Documents. The contract documents shall consist of the following: a. This Contract f. General Provisions ' b. Addenda g. Special Provisions c. Information for Bidders h. Technical Specifications d. Notice to Bidders I. Drawing and/or Sketches ' e. Signed Copy of Bid This contract and the otherdocuments enumerated in this paragraph,form the Contract between the parties. These documents are as fully a part of the contract as if attached hereto or repeated herein. 18. Complete Understanding, Merger. Parties agree that this document including those documents described in the section entitled "Contract Documents"represent the full and complete understanding of the ' parties. This contact includes only those goods and services specifically set out. This contract supersedes all prior contracts and understandings between the Contractor and the City. ' 19. Authorship and Enforcement. Parties agree that the production of this document was the joint effort of both parties ' and that the contract should not be construed as having been drafted by either party. In the event that either party shall seek to enforce the terms of this contract through litigation, the prevailing party in such action shall be entitled to receive, in addition to ' any other relief, its reasonable attorneys fees, expenses and costs. • 20. Amendments. ' This contract may not be modified, changed or altered by any oral promise or statement by whomsoever made; nor shall any modification of it be binding upon the City until ' such written modification shall have been approved in writing'by an authorized officer • of the City. Contractor acknowledges that the City may not be responsible for paying ' for changes or modifications that were not properly authorized. 21. Waiver of Breech . ' Failure to Exercise Rights and Waiver: Failure to insist upon strict compliance with any of the terms covenants or conditions herein shall not be deemed a waiver of any such terms, covenants or conditions, nor shall any failure at one or more times be deemed ta waiver or relinquishment at any other time or times by any right under the terms, covenants or conditions herein. ' 22. Assignment. Neither party may sell or assign its rights or responsibilities under the terms of this ' agreement without the express consent of the remaining party. 23. Nondiscrimination. ' Contractor agrees in the performance of this contract not to discriminate on the ground or because of race, creed, color, national origin or ancestry, sex, religion, handicap, age, or political opinion or affiliation, against any employee of Contractor or applicant ' for employment and shall include a similar provision in all subcontracts let or awarded hereunder. 24. Notices. • All notices required to be in writing may be given by first class mail addressed to City of Jefferson, Department of Community Development, 320 East McCarty, Jefferson ' City, Missouri, 65101, and Contractor at PO Box 104444, Jefferson City, MO 65109. The date of delivery of any notice shall be the second full day after the day of its mailing. r • ' IN WITN SS W REOF,the parties hereto have set their hands and seals this l day of I . , 2008. ' CITY OF JEFFERSON CONTRACTOR 1 ay r Title: Elmer 0. Kiesling, P Vice President ATTEST: ATTEST: i • City Clerk i e: Jon Hartenstein Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM: City un for Bond #6598319 1 • PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND GUARANTEE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned ' United H.R.B. General Contractors, Inc., P.O. Box 104444, Jefferson City, MO 65110 ' hereinafter, referred to as "Contractor" and Safeco Insurance Company of America, P.O. Box 66769, St. Louis, MO 63166-6769 ' a Corporation organized under the laws of the State of ' Washington and authorized to transact business in the State of Missouri as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Jefferson, Missouri hereinafter referred to as"Owner" ' in the penal sum of Ninety-One Thousand Two Hundred Seventy-One & 00/100 DOLLARS ($ 91,271.00 ), lawful money of the United States of America for the ' payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves and our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THE FOREGOING OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT; ' WHEREAS, the above bounded Contractor has on the day of ,20 ,entered into a written contract with the aforesaid Owner ' forfurnishing all materials,equipment,tools,superintendence,labor,and otherfacilities and accessories, for the construction of certain improvements as designated, defined ' and described in the said Contract and the Conditions thereof, and in accordance with the specifications and plans therefore; a copy of said Contract being attached hereto ' and made a part hereof: ' NOW THEREFORE, if the said Contractor shall and will,in all particulars,well,duly and • faithfully observe, perform and abide by each and every covenant, condition, and part ' of the said Contract, and the Conditions, Specifications, Plans, Prevailing Wage Law 1 1 . . 1 and other Contract Documents thereto attached or, by reference, made a part thereof, ' according to the true intent and meaning in each case, and if said contractor shall replace all defective parts, material and workmanship for a period of one year after ' acceptance by the Owner, then this obligation shall be and become null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED FURTHER, that if the said Contractor fails to duly pay for any labor, ' materials, sustenances, provisions, provender, gasoline, lubricating oils, fuel oils, greases, coal repairs, equipment and tools consumed or used in said work, groceries ' and foodstuffs, and all insurance premiums, compensation liability, and otherwise, or any other supplies or materials used or consumed by such Contractor or his, their, or ' its subcontractors in performance of the work contracted to be done,the Surety will pay the same in any amount not exceeding the amount of this Obligation, together with ' interest as provided by law: ' PROVIDED FURTHER,that the said Surety,for value received, hereby stipulates and • agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract, or the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications accompanying the same, shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond and it does hereby waive ' notice of any change, extension of time,.alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work, or to the specifications: ' PROVIDED FURTHER,that if the said Contractor fails to pay the prevailing hourly rate of wages, as shown in the attached schedule, to any workman engaged in the ' construction of the improvements as designated, defined and described in the said contract, specifications and conditions thereof, the Surety will pay the deficiency and ' any penalty provided for by law which the contractor incurs by reason of an act or omission, in any amount not exceeding the amount of this obligation together with ' interest as provided by law: ' IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the said Contractor has hereunto set his hand, and the • said Surety has caused these presents to be executed in its name, and its corporate 1 • seal to be hereunto affixed, by it attorney-in-fact duly authorized thereunto so to do, at Jefferson City, MO on this the 4th day of September , 2008 Safeco Insurance Company of America United H.R.B. General Contractors, Inc. ' SURETY COMPANY CONTRACTOR BY (SEAL) BY i AL) ' L s„�st Elmer O. Kiesling, Vice Preent ' SEAL BY SEAL ' tome -in-fact Kris L. Bennett (State Representative) (Accompany this bond with Attomey-in-fact's authority from the Surety Company ' • certified to include the date of the bond.) 1 1 • 1 S A F E C Cr SAFECO Insurance Company PO Box 34526 ' Seattle,WA 98124-1526 ' ACKNOWLEDGMENT BY SURETY STATE OF Missouri ' County of Cole ss. ' On this 4th day of September 2008 before me personally appeared Kris L. Bennett , known to, me to be the Attorney-in-Fact of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, FIRST NATIONAL ' INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA or SAFECO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY the corporation that executed the within instrument,and acknowledged to me that such corporation executed the same. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal,at my office in the aforesaid County, the day and 1 year in this certificate first above written. 1 � ' Notary Publi in the State of Missouri (Seal) County of ri JANET HASLAG NOTARY PUBLIC-NOTARY SEAL STATE OF MISSOURI ' OSAGE COUNTY COMMISSION#06427065 MY COMMISSION EXPIRES: OCT. 18,2010 I 1 ' S-0230 1SAEF 10/99 ®A registered trademark of SAFECO Corporation FRP ' Safeco Insurance Company of America POWER General Insurance Company of America . Safeco Plaza OF ATTORNEY Seattle,WA 98185 ' No. 5462 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: ' That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, each a Washington corporation,does each hereby appoint ••""`""JESSICA ANDREWS;KRIS L.BENNETT;LOUIS A.LANDWEHR;CHARLES E.TRABUE;Jefferson City,Missouri" its true and lawful attomey(s}in-fact,with full authority to execute on its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other ' documents of a similar character issued in the course of its business,and to bind the respective company thereby. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have each executed and attested these presents this 15th day of July 2008 �l�iGtlzcJ ' STEPHANIE DALEY-WATSON,SECRETARY TIM MIKOLAJEWSKI,SENIOR VICE-PRESIDENT,SURETY CERTIFICATE ' Extract from the By-Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: "Article V,Section 13.-FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS...the President,any Vice President,the Secretary,and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations,shall each have authority to appoint individuals as ' attorneys-in-fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and • other documents of similar character issued by the company in the course of its business...On any instrument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided,however,that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking." ' Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28,1970. "On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out, ' (i) The provisions of Article V,Section 13 of the By-Laws,and A copy of the power-of-attorney appointment,executed pursuant thereto,and (iii) Certifying that said power-of-attorney appointment is in full force and effect, the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile,and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof." I,Stephanie Daley-Watson Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA,do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By-Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of these corporations,and of a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto,are true and correct,and that both the By-Laws,the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation this 4th day of September 2008 c E COMP SEAL w SEAL X Ada.-u; 44GR../ y, x dJ� 11953 C.1921 STEPHANIE DALEY-WATSON,SECRETARY ' of SafecoO and the Safeco logo are registered trademarks of Safeco Corporation. • S-0974/DS 4/05 WEB PDF r 1 • Safeco Insurance Companies • ° Safeco Plaza 1 Seattle,WA 98185 i 1 IMPORTANT SURETY BOND INFORMATION MISSOURI 1 Your Safeco agent is a professional independent Insurance Agent. If you have specific questions about your Surety Bond,you may direct them to your agent. 1 MISSOURI SPECIFIC QUESTIONS If you have been unable to contact or obtain information from your agent, you may contact ' Safeco at the following address and telephone: AMERICAN STATES INSURANCE COMPANY 1 SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA Safeco Plaza,Suite 1700 1 Seattle,WA 98185-0001 • ' Mailing Address: P.O.Box 34526 Seattle,WA 98124 Telephone#206-473-3799 i i 1 i • S-36511SA 012007 Safeco and the Safeco Logo are registered trademarks of Safeco Corporation 1 XDP ACORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE OP ID CN DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) UNITE-1 09/04/08 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Winter-Dent & Company ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE 101 E. McCarty Street HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND,EXTEND OR P.O. Box 1046 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. J ferson City MO 65102-1046 e: 573-634-2122 Fax:573-636-7500 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# ' IN ED INSURER A: Travelers Property Casualty Co 25674 United H.R.B. General INSURER B: Travelers Indemnity Company Inc J. C. Indu stries, Inc INSURER C: Builders Assc. Self-Insurers 55003 J. C. Industries, ' P.O. BOX 104444 INSURER D: Jefferson City MO 65110 INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED.NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. 1NbK AUU' POLICY EXPIRATION LTR INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER DATE MM/DD DATE MM/DD LIMITS ' GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1000000 B X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DTC07828B56A 07/01/08 07/01/09 PREMISES(Ea occurence) $300000 CLAIMS MADE [X]OCCUR MED EXP(Any one person) $5000 ' PERSONAL BADVINJURY $1000000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $2000000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $2 000 0 00 POLICY X PRO JECT LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 1000000 A X ANY AUTO DT8107828B56A 07/01/08 07/01/09 (Ea accident) ALL OWNED AUTOS ' BODILY INJURY $ SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ NON-OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) ' PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) IMF GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY-EA ACCIDENT $ ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $ ' AUTO ONLY: AGG $ EXCESS/UMBRELLALIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $2000000 B X OCCUR 7 CLAIMSMADE DTSMCUP7828B56A 07/01/08 07/01/09 AGGREGATE $2000000 1 $ R DEDUCTIBLE $ X RETENTION $10000 $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X TORY LIMITS ER EMPLOYERS'LUIBIUTY C ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE 08WC0782 01/01/08 12/31/08 E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ 1000000 OFFICER/MEMBEREXCLUDED? E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1000000 If yyes,describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT 1$1000000 OTHER ' A Install Floater QT6604345B278 07/01/08 07/01/09 Limit 1000000 A Hired Equipment QT6604345B278 07/01/08 07/01/09 Limit 350000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS ' Project #63015, Bus Transfer Station 820 E Miller. 1 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION ' JEFFE—1 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN • NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL City Of Jefferson IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER,ITS AGENTS OR 320 East McCarty REPRESENTATIVES. Jefferson City MO 65101 AU ORREDREP ESENj,� ' ACORD 25(2001/08) ©ACORD CORPORATION 1988 1 IMPORTANT • � I If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). ' If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER ' The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between ' the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. • 1 ACORD 25(2001108) ' ' - s • ' Insurance • Bonds Employee Benefits • Financial Services ' September 4, 2008 City of Jefferson 320 East McCarty Street Jefferson City, MO 65101 RE: Contractor: United H.R.B. General Contractors, Inc. Bond No. 6598319 Project: Project No. 63015, Bus Transfer Station 820 E. Miller Gentlemen, Please accept this letter as your authority to date the Bonds on the above captioned project to coincide with the date of the contract. 1 • Once the contracts have been signed, I would appreciate receiving a copy of the contract and the dated bond with Power of Attorney for my file. ' Smc rely, I ' Kris '. Bennett ' Attorney-In-Fact. 1 ' 101 E.McCarty St. www.winterdent.com Local 573-634-2122 P.O.Box 1046 Fax 573-636-7500 ' Jefferson City,MO 65102-1046 Toll Free 800-769-3472 FORWARD GENERAL PROVISIONS • ' The following rticles GP-1 through GP-49 are"General Provisions of the Contract",modified as set forth 9 9 in the Special Provisions. GP-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ' It is expressly understood and agreed that the Contract Documents comprise the Notice to Bidders, Instruction to Bidders,General Provisions,Special Provisions,Bid,Contract,Performance and One Year Guarantee Bond, Specifications, other documents listed in the Table of Contents and bound in this Volume. Plans,all Addenda thereto issued prior to the time of opening bids for the work, all of which are ' hereto attached,and other drawings,specifications,and engineering data which may be furnished by the Contractor and approved by the Owner,together with such additional drawings which may be furnished by the Engineer from time to time as are necessary to make clear and to define in greater detail the intent ' of the specifications and drawings, are each and all component parts to the agreement governing the work to be done and the materials equipment to be furnished. All of these documents are hereby defined as the Contract Documents. The several parts of the Contract Documents are complementary,and what is called for by anyone shall be as binding as if called for by all. The intention of the Documents is to include the furnishing of all materials,labor,tools,equipment and supplies necessary for constructing complete and ready to use the ' work specified. Materials or work described in words which so applied have a well known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. The Contract shall be executed in the State and County where the Owner is located. Three (3)copies ' . of the contract documents shall be prepared by the Contractor, each containing an exact copy of the Contractor's bid as submitted,the Performance Bond properly executed,a Statutory Bond where required, and the contract agreement signed by both parties thereto. These executed contract documents shall be filed as follows: One (1)with the City Clerk of the City of Jefferson One(1)with the Jefferson City Director of Community Development One(1)with the Contractor ' GP-2 DEFINITIONS Wherever any work or expression defined in this article, or pronoun used in its stead, occurs in these ' contract documents, it shall have and is mutually understood to have the meaning herein given: 1. "Contract"or"Contract Documents"shall include all of the documents enumerated in the previous article. 2. "Owner", "City', or words "Party of the First Part", shall mean the party entering into contract to secure performance of the work covered by this Contract and his or its duly authorized officers or agents. Generally this will be the"City of Jefferson". 3. "Contractor"or the words"Party of the Second Part"shall mean the party entering into contract ' for the performance of the work covered by this contract and his duly authorized agents or legal representatives. 4. "Subcontractors"shall mean and refer to a corporation, partnership,or individual having a direct ' contract with the Contractor,for performing work at the job site. • 5. "Engineer"shall mean the authorized representative of the Director of Community Development, ' (i.e., the Engineering Division Director). 6. "Construction Representative"shall mean the engineering or technical assistant duly authorized ' by the Engineer limited to the particular duties entrusted to him or them as subsequently set forth • herein. , 7. "Date of Award of Contract" or words equivalent thereto, shall mean the date upon which the successful bidder's proposal is accepted by the City. 8. "Day"or"days", unless herein otherwise expressly defined, shall mean a calendar day or days ' of twenty-four hours each. 9. 'The work" shall mean the work to be done and the equipment, supplies and materials to be ' furnished under this contract, unless some other meaning is indicated by the context. 10. "Plans"or"drawings"shall mean and include all drawings which may have been prepared by the ' Engineer as a basis for proposals, all drawings submitted by the successful bidder with his proposal and by the Contractor to the City, if and when approved by the Engineer, and all drawings submitted by the City to the Contractor during the progress of the work,as provided for herein. , 11. Whenever in these contract documents the words"as directed","as required","as permitted","as allowed", or words or phrases of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, , requirement, permission, or allowance of the City and Engineer is intended. 12. Similarly the words"approved", "reasonable", "suitable","acceptable", "properly", "satisfactory", or words of like effect and import, unless otherwise particularly specified herein, shall mean ' approved,reasonable,suitable,acceptable,proper or satisfactory in the judgment of the City and Engineer. 13. Whenever any statement is made in these Contract Documents containing the expression"it is • ' understood and agreed"or any expression of the like import,such expression means the mutual understanding and agreement of the Contractor and the City. 14. "Missouri Highway Specifications" shall mean the latest edition of the "Missouri Standard , Specifications for Highway Construction"prepared by the Missouri Highway and Transportation Commission and published before the date of this contract. ' 15. "Consultant" shall mean the firm, company, individual, or its/his/her duly authorized representative(s)under separate agreement with the City of Jefferson that prepared the plans, specifications, and other such documents for the work covered by this contract. ' GP-3 THE CONTRACTOR It is understood and agreed that the Contractor, has by careful examination satisfied himself as to the ' nature and location of the work,the conformation of the ground,the character,quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of the equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general local conditions, and all other matters which can in any , way affect the work under this Contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the City,either before or after the execution of this contract,shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. The relation of the Contractor to the City shall be that of an independent contractor. ' GP-4 THE ENGINEER , The Engineer shall be the City's representative during the construction period and he shall observe the • work in process on behalf of the City by a series of periodic visits to the job site. He shall have authority to act on behalf of the City. ' ' The Engineer assumes no direction of employees of the Contractor or subcontractors and no supervision of the construction activities or responsibility for their safety. The Engineer's sole responsibility during construction is to the City to endeavor to protect defects and deficiencies in the work. ' Any plan or method of work suggested by the Engineer, or other representative of the City, to the Contractor,but not specified or required,if adopted or followed by the Contractor in whole or in part, shall ' be used at the risk and responsibility of the Contractor; and the Engineer and the City will assume no responsibility therefore. GP-5 BOND ' Coincident with the execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish a good and sufficient surety bond in the full amount of the contract sum. This surety bond, executed by the Contractor to the City, ' shall be a guarantee: (a) for the faithful performance and completion of the work in strict accordance with the terms and intent of the contract documents; (b) the payment of all bills and obligations arising from this contract which might in any manner become a claim against the City; (c) for the payment to the City of all sums due or which may become due by the terms of the contract, as well as by reason of any violation thereof by the Contractor; and for a period of one year from and immediately following the acceptance of the completed project by the City,the payment to the City of all damage loss and expense which may occur to the City by reason of defective materials used,or by reason of defective or improper workmanship done, in the furnishing of materials, labor, and equipment in the performance of the said contract. All provisions of the bond shall be complete and in full accordance with statutory requirements. The bond ' shall be executed with the property sureties through a company licensed and qualified to operate in the state and approved by the City. Bond shall be signed by an agent resident in the state and date of bond shall be the date of execution of the contract. ' • If at any time during the continuance of the contract the surety on the Contractor's bond becomes irresponsible,the City shall have the right to require additional and sufficient sureties which the Contractor shall furnish to the satisfaction of the City within ten(10)days after notice to do so. In default thereof,the ' contract may be suspended, all payments.or money due the Contractor withheld, and the contract completed as hereinafter provided. GP-6 INSURANCE GP-6.1 GENERAL: ' The Contractor shall secure, pay for and maintain during the life of the Contract, insurance of such types and amounts as necessary to protect himself, and the City, against all hazards enumerated herein. All policies shall be in the amounts,form and companies satisfactory to the City. ' The insuring company shall deliver to the City certificates of all insurance required, signed by an authorized representative and stating that all provisions of the following specified requirements are complied with. ' All certificates of insurance required herein shall state that ten(10)days written notice will be given to the City before the policy is canceled or changed. All certifications of insurance shall be delivered to the City prior to the time that any operations under this contract are started. ' All of said Contractor's certificates of insurance shall be written in an insurance company authorized to do business in the State of Missouri. ' GP-6.2 BODILY INJURY LIABILITY&PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY INSURANCE (1) Bodily Injury Liability insurance coverage providing limits for bodily injuries,including death,of not less ' than$2,000,000 per person and$300,000 per occurrence. 1 (2) Property Damage Liability insurance coverage for limits of not less than $2,000,000 per one ' occurrence nor less than $2,000,000 aggregate to limit for the policy year. GP-6.3 CONTRACTOR'S PROTECTIVE BODILY INJURY LIABILITY & PROTECTIVE PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY INSURANCE: (COVERING OPERATIONS OF SUBCONTRACTORS) (1) Contractors contingent policy providing limits of at least$300,000 per person and $2,000,000 per , occurrence for bodily injury or death. (2) Property Damage Liability providing limits of at least $2,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate. GP-6.4 CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY Property Damage coverage with$2,000,000 aggregate limit. ' GP-6.5 OWNER'S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE ' The Contractor shall purchase and maintain Owner's Protective Liability and Property Damage insurance issued in the name of the Owner and the Engineer as will protect both against any and all claims that might arise as a result of the operations of the Contractor or his subcontractors in fulfilling this contract. , The minimum amount of such insurance shall be the same as required for Bodily Injury Liability and Property Damage Liability Insurance. This policy shall be filed with the Owner and a copy filed with the Engineer. ' GP-6.6 EXCLUSIONS The above requirements GP-6.2,6.3,6.5 for property damage liability shall contain no exclusion relative to: (1) Blasting or explosion. (Consult Technical Specifications Part I for possible deletion of this requirement on subject project.) (2) Injury or destruction of property below the surface of the ground, such as wires, conduits, pipes, mains, sewers, etc., caused by the Contractor's operations. ' (3) The collapse of,or structural injury to,any building or structure on or adjacent to the City's premises, or injury to or destruction of property resulting therefrom, caused by the removal of other buildings, ' structures, or supports, or by excavations below the surface of the ground. GP-6.7 AUTOMOBILE BODILY INJURY LIABILITY & AUTOMOBILE PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY INSURANCE , Contractor shall carry in his name, additional assured clauses protecting City, Liability Insurance with Bodily Injury or Death Limits of not less than$300,000 per person and$2,000,000 per occurrence, and ' property damage limits of not less than $300,000 with hired car and non-owned vehicle coverage or separate policy carrying similar limits. The above is to cover the use of automobiles and trucks on and off the site of the project. , GP-6.8 EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY AND WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION Employer's and Workmen's Compensation Insurance as will protect him against any and all claims , resulting from injuries to and death of workmen engaged in work under this contract, and in addition the • Contractor shall cant'occupational disease coverage with statutory limits, and Employer's Liability with a limit of$300,000 per person. The"All State"endorsement shall be included. , In case any class of employees is not protected under the Workmen's Compensation Statute, the • Contractor shall provide and cause such contractor to provide adequate employer's liability coverage as will protect him against any claims resulting from injuries to and death of workmen engaged in work under ' this contract. GP-6.9 INSTALLATION FLOATER INSURANCE This insurance shall insure and protect the Contractor and the City from all insurable risks of physical loss or damage to materials and equipment, not otherwise covered under Builder's Risk Insurance, when in warehouses or storage areas, during installation, during testing and until the work is accepted. It shall be of the"All Risks"type,with coverage designed for the circumstances which may occur in the particular work included in this contract. The coverage shall be for an amount not less than the value of the work at completion,less the value of the material and equipment insured under Builder's Risk Insurance. The value shall include the aggregate value of the City-furnished equipment and materials to be erected or installed by the Contractor not otherwise insured under Builder's Risk Insurance. Installation Floater Insurance shall also provide for losses, if any,to be adjusted with and made payable ' to the Contractor and the City as their interests may appear. If the aggregate value of the City-furnished and Contractor-furnished equipment is less than$10,000 such equipment may be covered under Builder's Risk Insurance, and if so covered, this Installation Floater Insurance may be omitted. GP-6.10 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR OTHER LOSSES For the considerations in this agreement heretofore stated, in addition to Contractor's other obligations, the Contractor assumes full responsibility for all loss or damage from any cause whatsoever to any tools owned by the mechanics, any tool machinery, equipment, or motor vehicles owned or rented by the • Contractor's, his agents, sub-contractors, material men or his or their employees; to sheds or other temporary structures, scaffolding and staging, protective fences, bridges and sidewalk hooks. The Contractor shall also assume responsibility for all loss or damage caused by, arising out of or incident to larceny,theft, or any cause whatsoever(except as hereinbefore provided)to the structure on which the work of this contract and any modifications, alterations, enlargements thereto, is to be done, and to materials and labor connected or to be used as a part of the permanent materials,and supplies necessary to the work. GP-6.11 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY ON DAMAGES&CLAIMS INDEMNIFYING CITY ' The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the City and Engineer and their officers and agents, of and from all losses,damages,costs, expenses,judgments,or decrees whatever arising out of action or suit that may be brought against the City or Engineer or any officer or agent of either of them,for or on account of the failure,omission,or neglect of the Contractor to do and perform any of the covenants,acts, ' matters,or things by this contract undertaken to be done or performed,or for the injury,death or damage caused by the negligence or alleged negligence of the Contractor or his subcontractors or his or their agents, or in connection with any claim or claims based on the lawful demands of subcontractors, ' workmen,material men,or suppliers of machineryand parts thereof,equipment,powertools and supplies incurred in the fulfillment of this contract. GP-6.12 NOTIFICATION IN EVENT OF LIABILITY OR DAMAGE ' Upon the occurrence of any event, the liability for which is herein assumed, the Contractor agrees to forthwith notify the City, in writing such happening,which notice shall forthwith give the details as to the ' happening,the cause as far as can be ascertained, the estimate of loss or damage done, the names of witnesses, if any, and stating the amount of any claim. • GP-T ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign or transfer this contract nor sublet it as a whole, without the written consent of the City and of the Surety on the Contractor's bond. Such consent of Surety, together with ' copy of assignment, shall be filed with the City. No assignment, transfer or subletting, even though consented to, shall relieve the Contractor of his liabilities under this contract. Should any assignee fail to perform the work undertaken by him in a satisfactory manner, the City may at his option annul and ' terminate Assignee's contract. GP-8 SUBCONTRACTS, PRINCIPAL MATERIALS &EQUIPMENT ' Prior to the award of the contract, the Contractor shall submit for approval of the City a list of subcontractors and the sources of the principal items of materials and equipment which he proposes to use in the construction of the project. ' The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors and of person either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and omissions or persons directly employed by him. Any notices to the Contractor shall be considered as ' notice to any affected subcontractors. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between any ' subcontractor and the City. No officer, agent or employee of the City, including the Engineer, shall have any power or authority whatsoever to bind the City or incur any obligation in its behalf to any subcontractor, material supplier or ' other person in any manner whatsoever. GP-9 OTHER CONTRACTS ' The City reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this work. The Contractor shall afford • other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs. , If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results on the work of any other contractor,the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Engineer any defect in such work that ' renders it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. His failure so to inspect and report all constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and proper for the reception of his work,except as to defects which may develop in the other contractor's work ' after the execution of his work. Wherever work being done by the City's forces or by other contractors is contiguous to work covered by this Contract,the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be established by the Engineer, , in order to secure the completion of the various portions of the work in general harmony. GP-10 LEGAL RESTRICTIONS, PERMITS AND REGULATIONS , The Contractor shall procure at his own expense all necessary licenses and permits of a temporary nature and shall give due and adequate notice to those in control of all properties which may be affected by his operations. Rights-of-way and easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing , facilities shall be provided by the City unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn or specified. ' GP-11 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS • It is agreed that all royalties for patents or patent claims, infringement whether such patents are for , processes or devices, that might be involved in the construction or use of the work, shall be included in 1 ' the contract amount and the Contractor shall satisfy all demands that may be made at any time for such • and shall be liable for any damages or claims for patent infringements,and the Contractor shall at his own expense, defend any and all suits or proceedings that may be instituted at any time against the City for infringement or alleged infringement of any patent or patents involved in the work,and in case of an award of damages,the said Contractor shall pay such award;final payment to the Contractor by the City will not be made while any such suits or claims remain unsettled. ' GP-12 SCOPE AND INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS AND PLANS GP-12.1 GENERAL These Specifications and Project Plans are intended to supplement, but not necessarily duplicate each other, and together constitute one complete set of Specifications and Plans so that any work exhibited in the one and not in the other, shall be executed just as if it has been set forth in both, in order that the work shall be completed according to the complete design of the Engineer. Should anything be omitted from the Specifications and Plans which is necessaryto a clear understanding of the work,or should it appear various instructions are in conflict,then the Contractor shall secure written instructions from the Engineer before proceeding with the construction affected by such omissions or discrepancies. It is understood and agreed that the work shall be performed and completed according to the true spirit, meaning and intent of the contract, specifications and plans. GP-12.2 FIGURED DIMENSIONS TO GOVERN Dimensions and elevations shown on the plans shall be accurately followed even though they differ from scaled measurements. No work shown on the plans,the dimensions of which are not indicated shall be executed until the required dimensions have been obtained from the Engineer. • GP-12.3 CONTRACTOR TO CHECK PLANS AND SCHEDULES The Contractor shall check all dimensions,elevations and quantities shown on the plans,and schedules given to him by the Engineer,and shall notify the Engineer of any discrepancy between the plans and the conditions on the ground,or any error or omission in plans,or in the layout as given by stakes, points, or instructions,which he may discover in the course of the work. The Contractor will not be allowed to take advantage of any error or omission in the plans or contract documents,as full instructions will be furnished by the Engineer should such error or omission be discovered, and the Contractor shall carry out such instructions as if originally specified. The apparent silence of the Plans and Specifications as to any detail or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any point, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practices, as accepted by the particular trades or industries involved, shall be used. ' GP-12.4 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS Reference to standard specifications of any technical society,organization or association,or to codes of ' local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative specification adopted and published at the date of taking bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. GP-13 CONSTRUCTION REPRESENTATIVE AT PROJECT The City may appoint or employ such "Construction Representative" as the City may deem proper, to observe the work performed under this Contract, to the end that said work is performed, in substantial accordance with the plans and specifications therefor. • The Project Representative assumes no direction of employees of the Contractor or Subcontractors and no supervision of the construction activities or responsibility for their safety. The sold duty of the Project ' Representative during the construction is to the City to endeavor to protect against defects and deficiencies in the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of the Construction Representative , so appointed, when the same are consistent with the obligations of this contract and the specifications • therefor, provided, however, that should the Contractor object to any order given by the Construction Representative, the Contractor may make written appeal to the Engineer for his decision. The Construction Representative and other properly authorized representatives of the City shall be free at all times to perform their duties, an intimidation or attempted intimidation of any one of them by the Contractor or by any of his employees shall be sufficient reason, if the City so decides, to annul the contract. Such construction representation shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform said work strictly in accordance with the plans and specifications or any modifications thereof as herein provided, and work not so constructed shall be removed and made good by the Contractor at his own expense,and free of all expense to the City, whenever so ordered by the Engineer, without reference to any previous ' oversight in observation of work. Any defective material or workmanship may be rejected by the Engineer at any time before the final acceptance of the work, even though the same may have been previously overlooked and estimated for payment. The Construction Representative shall have no authority to permit any deviation from the plans and ' specifications except on written order from the Engineer,and the Contractor will be liable for any deviation except on such written order. ' All condemned work shall be promptly taken out and replaced by satisfactory work, and all condemned materials shall be promptly removed from the vicinity of the work. Should the Contractor fail or refuse to comply with instructions in this respect the City may,upon certification by the Engineer,withhold payment ' or proceed to terminate contracts as herein provided. Reexamination of questioned work may be ordered by the Engineer,and if so ordered the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be done in accordance with the Contract Documents,the City • shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If such work be found not in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall pay such cost,unless he shall show that defect in the work was caused by another contractor of the City and in that event the City shall pay such cost. ' The Contractor shall furnish samples of testing purposes of any material required by the Engineer, and shall furnish any information required concerning the nature or source of any material which he proposes , to use. GP-14 LINES AND GRADES The Department of Community Development will set construction stakes establishing lines, scopes,and , continuous profile grade in road work, and center-line and bench marks for culvert work, and appurtenances as may be deemed necessary, and will furnish the Contractor, with all necessary information relating to lines, slopes, and grades, to lay out the work correctly. The Contractor shall , maintain these lines, grades, and bench marks and use them to lay out the work he is to perform under this contract. The Contractor shall notify the Department of Community Development not less than 48 hours before , stakes are required. No claims shall be made because of delays if the contractors fail to give such notice. The Contractor shall carefully preserve stakes and bench marks. If such stakes and bench mark become damaged,lost,displaced,or removed by the Contractor,they shall be reset at his expense and deducted from the payment for the work. Any work done without being properly located and established by base lines,offset stakes, bench marks, ' or other basic reference points checked bythe Construction Representative may be ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. • ' GP-15 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MATERIALS • The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of all materials furnished by him, and he shall replace at his own cost and expense any and all such material found to be defective in design or manufacture,or which has been damaged after delivery. This includes the furnishing of all materials and labor required for replacement of any installed materials which is found to be defective at any time prior to the expiration of one year from the date of final payment. The manufacturer of pipe for use on this project shall certify in writing to the City that all materials furnished for use in this project do conform to these specifications. Whenever standard tests are conducted, he shall forward a copy of the test results to the City. GP-16 WATER All water required for and in connection with the work to be performed shall be provided by the Contractor ' at his sole cost and expense. GP-17 POWER ' All power for lighting, operation of the Contractor's plant or equipment or for any other use by the Contractor, shall be provided by the Contractor at his sole cost and expense. GP-18 SUPERINTENDENCE AND WORKMANSHIP The Contractor shall keep on his work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions ' given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide proper tools and equipment and the services of all workmen, mechanics, tradesmen,and other employees necessary in the construction and execution of the work contemplated ' and outlined herein. The employees of the Contractor shall be competent and willing to perform • satisfactorily the work required of them. Any employee who is disorderly, intemperate or incompetent or who neglects or refuses to perform his work in a satisfactorily manner, shall be promptly discharged. ' It is called particularly to the Contractor's attention that only first class workmanship will be acceptable. GP-19 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC ' Whenever any street is closed,the Police Department, Fire Department, and Ambulance Services shall be notified prior to the closing. When a portion of the project is closed to through traffic, the Contractor shall provide proper barricades and shall mark a detour route around the section of the project if applicable. The route of all detours shall be approved by the Director of Community Development. All detour signing shall conform to the latest edition of the"Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices". Throughout the project,wherever homes are served directly from a street or portion of a street which is to be reconstructed under this project, the Contractor shall make every effort to provide access to each ' home every night. This work shall be subsidiary to the construction and no direct payment will be made for it. GP-20 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS ' All streets, roads, highways,and other public thoroughfares which are closed to traffic shall be protected by means of effective barricades on which shall be placed acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section. ' All open trenches and other excavations shall be provided with suitable barriers, signs, and lights to the extent that adequate protection is provided to the public. Obstructions, such as material piles and equipment, shall be provided with similar warning signs and lights. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated by means of warning lights at night. All lights used • for this purpose shall be kept burning from sunset to sunrise. Materials stored upon or alongside public ' streets and highways shall be so placed,and the work at all times shall be so conducted,as to cause the minimum obstruction and inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades, signs, lights and other protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity , with applicable statutory requirements, and in conformance with the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control • Devices. All necessary barricades, signs, lights and other protective devices will be furnished, installed ' and maintained bythe Contractor. This work shall be subsidiary to the construction and no direct payment will be made for it. GP-21 EXISTING UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS AND STRUCTURES ' Pipe lines and other existing underground installations and structures in the vicinity of the work to be done hereunder are indicated on the plans according to the best information available to the City. The City does not guarantee the accuracy of such information. The Contractor shall make every effort to locate all underground pipe lines, conduits and structures by contacting owners of underground utilities and by prospecting in advance of the excavation. Any delays to the Contractor caused by pipe lines or other underground structures or obstructions not ' shown by the plans, or found in locations different than those indicated, shall not constitute a claim for extra work, additional payment or damages. No payment will be made to the Contractor for locating and protecting utilities and cooperating with their ' owners,and any damages caused to the utilities by the Contractor's negligence shall be repaired entirely at the Contractor's expense. , Utilities, other than sanitary sewers and water mains, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, must be moved will be moved by the utility company at no cost to the Contractor. Sanitary sewers which must be moved shall be re-laid by the Contractor and paid for at the prices bid. Only sewers which must be moved ' because of direct conflict with the storm sewer conduit will be paid for in this manner. Sewers damaged by excavation but not in direct conflict with the storm sewer will be repaired at the Contractor's expense. GP-22 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY • ' The Contractor shall be accountable for any damages resulting from his operations. He shall be fully responsible for the protection of all persons including members of the public, employees of the City and ' employees of other contractors or subcontractors and all public and private property including structures, sewers and utilities above and below ground, along, beneath, above, across or near the site or sites of the work, or other persons or property which are in any manner affected by the prosecution of the work. , The Contractor shall furnish and maintain all necessary safety equipment such as barriers,signs,warning lights and guards as required to provide adequate protection or persons and property. The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to the owner or owners of public or private property and utilities when such property is liable to injury or damage through the performance of the work, and shall make all necessary arrangements with such owner or owners relative to the removal and replacement , or protection of such property or utilities. In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the work or of adjoining property,the Contractor,without special instruction or authorization, is hereby permitted to act at his discretion to prevent such threatened ' loss or injury,and he shall so act. Any compensation,claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work, shall be determined by agreement or arbitration. The Contractor agrees to hold the City harmless from any and all loss or damages arising out of jurisdictional labor disputes or other labor troubles of any kind that may occur during the construction or performance of this contract. GP-23 GUARANTEE OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP , The Contractor hereby guarantees the work in connection with this contract against faulty materials or • poor workmanship during the period of one(1)year after the date of completion of the contract. , ' GP-24 NO WAIVER OF RIGHTS • Neither observation of work by the City or any of their officials, employees, or agents, nor any order by ' the City for payment of money, or any payment for, or acceptance of, the whole or any part of the work by the City, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the City or its employees, shall operate as a waiver of any provision of this contract, or of any power herein reserved to the City, or any ' right to damages herein provided, nor shall any waiver of any breach in this contract be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. GP-25 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS If desired by the City,portions of the work may be placed in service when completed or partially completed and the Contractor shall give proper access to the work for this purpose;but such use and operation shall ' not constitute an acceptance of the work, and the Contractor shall be liable for defects due to faulty construction until the entire work under this Contract is finally accepted and for the guarantee period thereafter. GP-26 ADDITIONAL, OMITTED, OR CHANGED WORK The Owner,without invalidating the Contract,may order additional work to be done in connection with the ' Contract or may alter or deduct from the work,the Contract sum to be adjusted accordingly. All such work shall be executed to the same standards of workmanship and performance as though therein included. The Engineer shall have authority to make minor changes in the work, not involving cost, and not ' inconsistent with the purposes of the work. Except for adjustments of estimated quantities for unit price work or materials to conform to actual pay ' quantities therefor as may be provided for in the Special Conditions, all changes and alterations in the • terms or scope of the Contract shall be made under the authority of duly executed change orders issued and signed by the Owner and accepted and signed by the Contractor. All work increasing the cost shall be done as authorized by the Owner and ordered in writing by the Engineer,which order shall state the ' location,character,amount,and method of compensation. No additional or changed work shall be made unless in pursuance of such written order by the Engineer, and no claim for an addition to the Contract sum shall be valid unless so ordered. ' If the modification or alteration increases the amount of work to be done,and the added work or any part thereof is of a type and character which can be properly and fairly classified under one or more unit price items of the Proposal, then such added work or part thereof shall be paid for according to the amount actually done and at the applicable unit price or prices therefor. Otherwise, such work shall be paid for as"Extra Work"as hereinafter provided in this Article GP-26. If the modification or alteration decreases the amount of work to be done, such decrease shall not ' constitute the basis for a claim for damages or anticipated profits on work affected by such decrease. Where the value of omitted work is not covered by applicable unit prices, the Engineer shall determine on an equitable basis the amount of: ' 1. Credit due the Owner for Contract work not done as a result of an authorized change. 2. Allowance to the Contractor for any actual loss incurred in connection with the purchase,delivery ' and subsequent disposal of materials or equipment required for use on the work planned and which could not be used in any part of the work as actually built. ' 3. Any other adjustment of the Contract amount where the method to be used in making such adjustments is not clearly defined in the contract documents. • Statements for extra work shall be rendered by the Contractor not later than fifteen (15)days after the ' completion of each assignment of extra work and if found correct will be approved by the Engineer and submitted for payment with the next regular monthly estimate. The Owner reserves the right to contract with any person or firm other than the Contractor for any or all ' extra work. The Contractor's attention is especially called to the fact that he shall be entitled to no claim • for damages or anticipated profits on any portion of the work that may be omitted. , Extra Work: (a) The term "Extra Work" shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required to ' accomplish any change or alteration in or addition to the work shown by the Plans or reasonably implied by the Specifications and not covered by the Contract proposal items and which is not otherwise provided under this Article GP-26. ' (b) The Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Engineer when authorized by the Owner. The compensation to be paid the Contractor for performing extra work shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: , 1. Method A: By agreed unit price 2. Method B: By agreed lump sum ' 3. Method C: If neither Method A or B can be agreed upon before the work is started,then the work shall be by force account as per Section 109, Measurement and Payment, of the Missouri , Standard Specification for Highway Construction,as published bythe Missouri State Highwayand Transportation Commission. GP-27 SUSPENSION OF WORK The Owner may at any time suspend the work, or any part thereof by giving ten (10)days notice to the Contractor in writing. The work shall be resumed by the Contractor within ten (10)days after the date , fixed in the written notice from the Owner to the Contractor to do so. But if the work, or any part thereof, shall be stopped by the notice in writing aforesaid, and if the Owner does not give notice in writing to the Contractor to resume within a reasonable period of time, then the , Contractor may abandon that portion of the work so suspended and he will be entitled to the estimates and payments for all work done on the portions abandoned, if any. GP-28 OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK ' If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this contract, the Owner, after ten (10)days written notice to the Contractor, may, without prejudice to any ' other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor. GP-29 OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT , If the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt, or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency, or if he should ' persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials, or if he should fail to make prompt payment to subcontractors or for material or labor, or persistently disregard laws, ordinances or the ' instructions of the Engineer, or otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the Contract, then the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor five(5)days written notice,terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools, and appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever ' method he may deem expedient. In such case, no further payment will be made the Contractor until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the expense of finishing the work, including compensation for ' additional managerial and administrative services,such expenses shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. tGP-30 CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT If the work should be stopped under an order of any court, or other public authority,for a period of three ' months,through no act or fault of the Contractor or of anyone employed by him,then the Contractor may, upon five(5)days written notice to the Owner and the Engineer,stop work or terminate his contract and recover from the Owner payment for all work executed and any loss sustained upon any plant or materials ' and reasonable profit and damages. GP-31 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES 1 All loss or damage arising out of the nature of the work to be done,of from the action of the elements, or from floods or overflows,or from ground water,or from any unusual obstruction of difficulty,or any other natural or existing circumstances either known or unforeseen, which may be encountered in the ' prosecution of the said work,shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. GP-32 SUNDAY, HOLIDAY AND NIGHT WORK ' No work shall be done between the hours of 6:00 p.m.and 7:00 a.m., nor on Sundays or legal holidays, without the written approval of the City. However, work necessary in case of emergencies or for the protection of equipment or finished work may be done without the City's approval. ' Night work may be established by the Contractor as a regular procedure with the written permission of the City; such permission however, may be revoked at any time by the City if the Contractor fails to maintain adequate equipment and supervision for the proper prosecution and control of the work at night. ' GP-33 UNFAVORABLE CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS ' During unfavorable weather,wet ground, or other suitable construction conditions, the Contractor shall • confine his operations to work which will not be affected adversely thereby. No portion of the work shall be constructed under conditions which would affect adversely the quality or efficiency thereof, unless special means or precautions are taken by the Contractor to perform the work in a proper and satisfactory ' manner. GP-34 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ' Unless specifically provided otherwise in each case,all materials and equipment furnished for permanent installation in the work shall be new, unused, and undamaged when installed or otherwise incorporation in the work. No such material or equipment shall be used by the Contractor for any purpose other than ' that intended or specified, unless such use is specifically authorized by the Engineer in each case. GP-35 DEFENSE OF SUITS In case any action at law or suit in equity is brought against the City or any officer or agent of them for or on account of the failure, omission, or neglect of the Contractor to do and perform any of the covenants, acts, matters,or things by this contract undertaken to be done or performed, or for the injury or damage 1 caused by the negligence or alleged negligence of the Contractor or his subcontractors or his or their agents, or in connection with any claim or claims based on the lawful demands of subcontractors, workmen, material men, or suppliers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies incurred in the fulfillment of this contract,the Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the City and their officers and agents, of and from all losses, damages, costs, expenses, judgments, or decrees whatever arising out of such action or suit that may be brought as aforesaid. ' GP-36 CHANGE ORDER • Any changes or additions to the scope of work shall be through a written order from the Engineer to the Contractor directing such changes in the work as made necessary or desirable by unforeseen conditions ' or events discovered or occurring during the progress of the work. 1 GP-37 CONTRACT TIME The time for the completion of the work is specked and it is an essential part of the contract. The Contractor will not be entitled to any extension of contract time because of unsuitable weather condition ' unless suspension of the work for such conditions was authorized in writing by the Engineer. If the time for the completion of the work is based upon working days, this time will be specified in the ' contract. A working day is defined as any day when, in the judgment of the Engineer, soil and weather conditions are such as would permit any then major operation of the project for six (6) hours or over unless other unavoidable conditions prevent the Contractor's operation. If conditions are such as to stop work in less than six(6) hours, the day will not be counted as a working day. No working days will be counted from December 15 to March 15, both dates inclusive. Saturdays, Sundays, and City holidays will not be counted as working days any time during the year. ' GP-38 CONTRACT TIME EXTENSION The Engineer may make allowance for time lost due to causes which he deems justification for extension ' of contract time. If the Contractor claims an extension of contract time on the grounds that he is unable to work due to causes beyond his control, he shall state his reasons in writing,furnish proof to establish his claim and state the approximate number of days he estimates he will be delayed. Notice of intention ' to claim an extension of contract time on the above grounds shall be filed with the Engineer at the time the cause or causes occur and the claim shall be filed in writing within 30 days after the claimed cause for the delay has ceased to exist. ' GP 39 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of the contract and it is therefore important that the work be pressed ' vigorously to completion. Should the Contractor or in case of default the surety fail to complete the work • within the time specified in the contract, or within such extra time as may be allowed in the manner set out in the preceding sections, a deduction of an amount as set out in the contract will be made for each day and every calendar day that such contract remains uncompleted after the time allowed for the ' completion. The said amount set out in the proposal is hereby agreed upon, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for loss to the City and the public, after the expiration of the time stipulated in the contract,and will be deducted from any money due the Contractor under the contract,and the Contractor ' and his surety shall be liable for any and all liquidated damages. Permitting the Contractor to continue and finish the work or any part of it after the expiration of the specified time,or after any extension of the time, shall in no way operate as a waiver on the part of the City or any of its rights under the contract. GP-40 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT , (a) BASIS FOR PAYMENT ' Contractor will be paid for quantities actually constructed or performed as determined by field measurement (except as may be hereinafter provided) at the unit price bid for the items listed in the schedule of the Bid or for such extra work as may be authorized and approved by the Engineer. The cost ' of incidental work not listed in the schedule of the Bid but necessary for the completion of the project shall be included in bid items. (b) DEDUCTIONS FOR UNCORRECTED WORK ' If the Engineer deems it expedient not to correct work that has been damaged or that was not done in accordance with the Contract, an equitable deduction from the Contract price shall be made therefore. ' (c) LUMP SUM ITEMS • Payment for each lump sum item shall be at the lump sum bid for the item,complete in place, and shall ' include the costs of all labor, materials, tools, and equipment to construct the item as described herein and to the limits shown on the plans. ' (d) PARTIAL PAYMENT • Partial payment will be made on a monthly basis. The payment shall be based on the work that has been found generally acceptable under the contract by the Engineer or inspector. A retainer equal to 10%of the amount of work completed to date shall be withheld. (e) ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance,the Engineer will promptly make such inspection, and when he finds the work acceptable under the Contract and the ' Contract fully performed he will promptly issue a final certificate, over his own signature, stating that the work required by this contract has been completed and is acceptable by him under the terms and conditions thereof, and the entire balance found to be due the Contractor, including the retained ' percentage, shall be paid to the Contractor by the City of Jefferson within thirty(30)days after the date of said final certificate. (f) AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE ' Monies due to the Contractor will not be delivered to the Contractor without presentation to the Department of Community Development an Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Law on ' prescribed form attached to the back of these contract documents. GP-41 RELEASE OF LIABILITY The acceptance by the Contractor of the last payment shall operate as and shall be a release to the Owner and every officer and agent thereof,from all claims and liability to the Contractor for anything done or furnished for, or relating to the work, or for any act or neglect of the Owner or of any person relating to or affecting the work. too GP-42 CERTIFICATIONS ' GP-42.1 All suppliers of materials such as drainage pipe or handrail and all suppliers of asphaltic concrete or portland cement concrete mixtures shall certify in writing that the product as supplied conforms fully with these specifications. Such certification shall be delivered in triplicate to the Department of Community Development at least 24 hours before the product is to be used on the project. GP-42.2 The City, at its option, may perform or have performed such tests as may be deemed ' necessary to further assure that only specified materials are incorporated into the work. GP-43 LOCAL PREFERENCE ' In making purchases or in letting contracts for the performance of anyjob or service,the purchasing agent shall give preference to all firms,corporations or individuals which maintain offices or places of business within the corporate limits of the City of Jefferson, when the quality of the commodity or performance ' promised is equal or better and the price quoted is the same or less. GP-44 PREFERENCE FOR U.S. MANUFACTURED GOODS On purchases in excess of$5,000,the City shall select products manufactured,assembled or produced in the United States, if quantity,quality,and price are equal. Every contract for public works construction or maintenance in excess of$5,000 shall contain a provision requesting the contractor to use American ' products in the performance of the contract. • GP-45 AWARD OF CONTRACT-REJECTION OF BIDS All bidders are required to submit with bid Minority Business Enterprise Eligibility Forms for all subcontractors and suppliers who the contractor intends to use on the project. Compliance with this 1 requirement and the Minority Business Enterprise Program shall be a consideration for award of this ' contract. • The contract will be awarded to the lowest and best responsible bidder on the base bid proposal, ' complying with the conditions of the Advertisement for bids and Specifications, providing the bid is reasonable and it is in the interest of the City of Jefferson, Missouri to accept same. The bidder to whom an award is made will be notified at the earliest possible date. The City of Jefferson, however, reserves , the right to reject any and all bids and to waive all informalities in bids received whenever such rejection or waiver is in their interest. GP-46 AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE WITH PUBLIC WORKS' CONTRACTS LAW Upon completion of project and prior to final payment,each contractor and subcontractor hereunder shall file with the City of Jefferson, Missouri, Department of Community Development, an affidavit stating that ' the contractor or subcontractor has fully complied with the provisions and requirements of Section 290.290,RSMo(1994 as amended),an act relating to public works contracts. The City of Jefferson shall not issue a final payment until such affidavit is filed. GP-47 MISSOURI LABORER REQUIREMENT ' Whenever there is a period of excessive unemployment in Missouri, which is defined as any month ' immediately following two consecutive calendar months during which the level of unemployment in the State has exceeded five percent(5%)as measured by the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics in its monthly publication of employment and unemployment figures, only Missouri laborers or laborers from non- restrictive states may be hired by the contractor or subcontractors to work on this Public Works'contract. ' An exception shall exist when Missouri laborers or laborers from non-restrictive states are not available or are incapable or performing the particular type of work involved, if so certified by the contractor or subcontractor hereunder and approved by the Director of Community Development of the City of ' Jefferson, Missouri. Nor does this provision apply to regularly employed non-resident executive, supervisory or technical personnel or projects where federal aid funds are being utilized in the act and this provision would conflict with any federal statute, rule or regulation. Laborers from non-restrictive states means persons who are residents of a state which has not enacted ' state laws restricting Missouri laborers from working on public works projects in that state,as determined by the Missouri Labor and Industrial Relations Commission. A Missouri laborer means any person who 1 has resided in Missouri for at least thirty(30)days and intends to become or remain a Missouri resident. GP-48 LIABILITY FOR COMPLIANCE WITH PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS LAW AND MISSOURI LABORER REQUIREMENT ' In the event a contractor or subcontractor hereunder files with the City of Jefferson an affidavit stating that the contractor or subcontractor has fully complied with the provisions and requirements of Section 290.290, RSMo(1994 as amended), when in fact the contractor or subcontractor has not complied, to ' the extent that any liability is assessed against the City of Jefferson,Missouri,or any additional expenses are incurred by the City of Jefferson, Missouri, any contractor making the false statement, or whose subcontractor makes a false statement, shall hold harmless and indemnify the City for any liability , assessed against it or any additional expenses incurred. Any contractor who fails to comply with the requirements of hiring only Missouri laborers or laborers from non-restrictive states,absent statutory exceptions,whenever there is a period of excessive unemployment , in Missouri,agrees to hold harmless and indemnify the City of Jefferson,Missouri,for any liability that may be assessed against it or any additional expenses incurred by the City of Jefferson, Missouri, because of the contractor or subcontractor's failure to comply. ' END OF GENERAL PROVISIONS ' SPECIAL PROVISIONS i ' FORWARD: The provisions of this section take precedence over any other provisions in these specifications. ' SP-1 PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE OF BID The City reserves the right to accept any part or the entire bid for the project. ' SP-2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Prior to starting work, a pre-construction conference will be held to discuss the project, its ' scheduling and its coordination with the work of others. It is expected that this conference will be attended by representatives of the Owner, the Engineer, the Contractor and his Subcontractors, and the Utilities, as well as representatives of any other affected agencies which the Owner may ' wish to invite. SP-3 PREVAILING WAGE LAW ' Bidders are hereby advised that compliance with the Prevailing Wage Law, Section 290.210 through 290.340 inclusive of the Revised Statutes of Missouri, is a requirement of this contract. (Reference Section IB-20) ' Section 290.265 requires that a clearly legible statement of all prevailing hourly wage rates should be kept posted in a prominent and easily accessible place at the site by each contractor and subcontractor engaged in public works projects, and that such notice shall remain posted during the full time. ' SP-4 PROOF OF INSURANCE ' All certificates of insurance provided for this project shall be insured directly from the company affording coverage. Certification from a local agent is not acceptable without the necessary paperwork empowering and authorizing the agent to sign the surety's name. ' In addition, when an aggregate amount is included, a statement of the amount of that aggregate available to date shall also be attached. ' SP-5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS The Technical Specifications for this project shall consist of: ' 1. Section 01010 Summary of Work 2. Section 01040 Coordination 3. Section 01300 Submittals ' 4. Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 01700 Execution Requirements 6. Section 02230 Site Clearing and Preparation ' 7. Section 02300 Earthwork 8. Section 02900 Landscaping 9. Section 02910 Lawn Seeding Specifications 10. Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 11. Section 04200 Unit Masonry 12. Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 13. Section 06200 Finish Carpentry ' 14. Section 07900 Joint Sealants 1 15. Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames ' 16. Section 08710 Door Hardware 17. Section 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies ' 18. Section 09678 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 19. Section 09900 Painting 20. Section 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 21. Section 15000 General Requirements ' 22. Section 15410 Plumbing Piping 23. Section 15440 Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties 24. Section 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ' 25. Section 16060 Grounding and Bonding 26. Section 16120 Conductors and Cables 27. Section 16130 Raceways and Boxes 28. Section 16140 Wiring Devices ' 29. Section 16442 Panel Boards 30. Section 16476 Disconnect Switches 31. Section 16521 Interior and Exterior Lighting These technical specifications are contained within the Section entitled"Technical Specifications" included in this document. Details, plan sheets, sites plan showing overall final grading requirements, and all other drawings ' contained within the plan set shall be used in constructing this project. SP-6 TRAFFIC CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION All work within the right-of-way shall be in accordance with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. Signs, cones, and barricades shall be placed both to protect workers and equipment ' and to protect the public by marking open trenches and other potential dangers. SP-7 ACCESS TO ADJACENT PROPERTIES Pedestrian access shall be maintained at all times. Suitable access shall be provided across , trenches, ditches or other barriers and obstacles for pedestrian traffic. Appropriate devices shall be used to warn the public of the dangers that may be present. ' SP-8 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PROPERTIES Surface water shall be diverted and otherwise prevented from entering or damaging adjacent ' property as a result of precipitation during construction. SP-9 UTILITIES ' The Contractor shall expose all utility crossings to establish location and depths prior to construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the utility companies for the adjustment ' of any existing utility. SP-10 CONSTRUCTION STAKING All staking required for this project shall be the responsibility of the contractor. All associated costs shall be considered incidental to the project. , SP-11 REMOVALS The removal of all existing improvements required for to construction of the proposed ' ' improvements will be considered incidental to the project and no direct payment will be made. All • improvements which are to remain shall be isolated by full depth saw cuts. ' SP-12 SEALED SET OF PLANS AND COMPLIANCE WITH BUILDING CODE The drawings or specifications contained herein are not intended as a substitute for drawings and ' specifications prepared by a design professional licensed in the State of Missouri. These drawings and specifications are intended only as a guide during design of the building and foundation. A complete set of drawings and specifications will be a requirement of the contract, ' and the drawings and specifications will need to be sealed by a design professional (i.e., Professional Engineer or Architect) registered in the State of Missouri. ' END OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • 1 1 • TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ' BUS TRANSFER STATION ' 820 E. MILLER PROJECT NO. 63015 SECTION 01010-SUMMARY OF WORK IPART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Project consists of the construction of a 10,240 SF Fire Apparatus Storage Building and associated,improvements at the City of Jefferson Hyde Park Complex.. 1. Project Location:2300 Hyde Park Road,Jefferson City,MO 2. Owner: City of.Jefferson, 320 East McCarty Street,Jefferson City,Missouri 65101. 3. Contract Documents,dated February 2006. ' 1.4 WORK PERFORMED BY THE OWNER B. General:The Contractor must coordinate his construction activities with the Owner's activities. C. During the course of the contract,the Owner will be performing the following work; 1. Rough grading of site to+/-.one foot of final grade 2. Installation of storm water inlets and piping. 3. Installation of 4"sanitary sewer lateral to within 50 feet of the new building. 4. Other miscellaneous construction work as deemed necessary. ' • 1.5 FUTURE WORK(NOT APPLICABLE) 1.6 WORK SEQUENCE �. A. The contractor shall supply to the owner a schedule of his/her proposed work. 1.7 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations to areas within contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Work is indicated. 1 B. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy and use by the public. C. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner,the Owner's employees,and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas ' for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. 1.8 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion,provided such occupancy does not interfere ' with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. ' 1. The Project Engineer will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner occupancy. • 2. Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. ' Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy,the Owner -- SUMMARY OF WORK 01010- 1 1 will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of the , building. 3. Upon occupancy;the Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for , occupied portions of the building. 1.9 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE(NOT APPLICABLE) ' 1.10 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS(NOT APPLICABLE) 1.11 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS(NONE) , PART 2-PRODUCTS(NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 -EXECUTION(NOT APPLICABLE) ' END OF SECTION 01010 , • • SUMMARY OF WORK 01010- 2 1 � _ • SECTION 01040 -COORDINATION 1i _ PART 1 -GENERAL I) 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 1 other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.� A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations including,but not necessarily limited to,the following: t 1. Coordination with the Owner's: a. Facility personnel. t b. Construction personnel. C. Inspection personnel. d. Design and Construction Management personnel. 1_l 2. General project coordination procedures. '1 3. Conservation. � • 4. Coordination Drawings. 5. Administrative and supervisory personnel. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section_"Summary of Work". 2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction V Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout"for coordinating contract closeout. ' 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction operations included.in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient i and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections.that depend on each other for proper installation,connection,and operation.. i� 1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components,before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required J maintenance,service,and repair. 3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. • B. Where necessary,prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved,outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices,reports,and attendance at meetings. ' COORDINATION 01040- 1 i 1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination oftheir work ' is required. • C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress ofthe Work. Such administrative activities include,but are not limited to,the following: I. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal oftemporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with ' consideration given to conservation of energy,water,and materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for , installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. 1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Comply with requirements contained in Section"Submittals." ' B. StaffNames: Within 10 days following receipt of the"Notice to Proceed",submit a list of the Contractor's • principal staff assignments,including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the Project ' Site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) , PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. , B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. ;1 END OF SECTION 01040 ,1 COORDINATION 01040-2 , i SECTION 01300-SUBMITTALS IPART 1 -GENERAL • RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications Sections,apply to this Section. I1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of work, including the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples. 4. Quality Assurance Submittals. 5. Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 6. Warranties. B. Administrative Submittals:Refer to General and Supplementary Condition,other applicable Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals ' include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Construction Progress Schedule including Schedule of Values 2. Performance and Payment Bonds. 3. Insurance certificates. 4. Application for Payment. • 5. Certified Payroll Reports. 6. MBE/WBE Reports. 7. Partial and Final Receipt of Payment and Release Forms. 8. Affidavit Compliance with Prevailing Wage Laws. 9. Notification,Permits,etc. 10. Record Drawings ' 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. The procedures shall comply with the General and Supplementary Conditions and other applicable sections of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall submit,with such promptness as to cause no delay in his work or in that of any other contractors,all required submittals indicated in Part 3.1 of this section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication,purchasing,testing,delivery,other submittals,and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Designer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received. • 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS ' A. . B. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight,encircle,or otherwise indicate , deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or dopy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to ' the Project is not a Shop Drawing. C. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings,settings diagrams,schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: ' 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. ' 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. , 6. Sheet size:Except for templates,patterns and similar full-size Drawings,submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches(215 by 280 mm)but no larger than 36 by 48 inches(890 by 1220 mm). ' 1.5 PRODUCT DATA A. � 1 B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information,such as manufacturer's installation instructions,catalog cuts, standard color charts,roughing-in diagrams and templates,_standard wiring diagrams,and performance curves. • 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products that are not required,mark copies to indicate the applicable ' information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. , b. Compliance with trade association standards. c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. ' e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements. 2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has , been confirmed. 1.6 SAMPLES A. B. Submit full-size,fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the ' material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured_or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials,color range sets,and swatches showing color,texture,and pattern. 1. Submit Samples for review of size,kind,color pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final ' • Submittals 01300-2 t I check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. I- 2. Field samples are full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes,coatings,or finish i materials and to establish the Project standard. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE DOCUMENTS A. I'i B. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data,certifications,manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports,and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the Specifications. C. Certifications:Where other Sections of Specifications require certifications that a product,material,or installation complies with specified requirements,submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements. ',. 1. Signature:Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company. ` D. Inspection and Test Reports: Submit the required inspection and test reports from independent testing ' agencies as specified in this section and in other sections of the Contract Documents. ag p ,) PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION ,4 3.1 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit the following information for materials and equipment to be provided under this contract. B. Legend: CODE TYPE OF SUBMITTAL 1. Shop Drawings ' 2. Product Data 3. Sample 4. Product Certifications,Weigh Tickets ' 5. Manufacturer's Instructions 6. Test Report 7. Field Report S. Wiring Diagrams 9. Record Photographs 10. Operation&Maintenance Data 11. Warranty 12. Special measures 13. Schedules 14. Special Drawings/Diagram ' 15. Personnel,Qualifications Submittals 01300-3 1 1 16. Proposal ' 17. Design Mixes C. List of required submittals: SECTION DESCRIPTION CODE ' 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete shop drawings of steel reinforcement and joint 1,2,14,17 ' layout, as well as Product data for each manufactured material and design mixes as indicated. 07901 lJoint Sealant product data. 2 ' 08110 Steel Doors and Frames samples for initial selection and verification, 1,2,3 product data,and shop drawings. , 08211 IFlush.Wood Doors product data. 2 08331 Overhead Coiling Doors samples for initial selection and product data as 2,3 indicated. ' 08361 Sectional Overhead Doors product data,shop drawings,samples and 1,2,3715 installer certificates as indicated. 08520 Aluminum Windows samples for initial selection as indicated. 3 ' 08710 Door Hardware product data,final hardware schedule. 2,13,14 09255 Gypsum Wallboard Assemblies Product Data. 2 09653 Resilient Wall Base and accessories product data and samples for initial 2,3 ' selection and verification as indicated. 09900 Painting product data,and samples as indicated. 2,3 ' 10800 Toilet and Bath accessories product data,and samples for initial selection 1,2,3 and setting drawings as indicated. ' 13125 Metal Buildings Systems 1,2,4,5,8,1 1,13,14 15000 General Requirements shop drawings as indicated,Product data,and special 1,2,14 ' drawings 15440 Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties product and maintenance data as 2,10 , indicated. 15460 Water Heaters product data 2 15500 Mechanical HVAC Equipment product and maintenance data,shop 1,2,8,10 t drawings and wiring diagrams as indicated. . 15610 IFumaces product and maintenance data. 2,10 ' 15672 Air cooled condensers Product&Maintenance data and shop drawings 1,2,10 16140 Wiring Devices product data,shop drawings, samples. 1,2,3 , 16442 IPanelboards qualification data,product data,maintenance data,shop 1,2,101-13, drawings,and schedules as indicated. 15 ' Submittals 01300-4 1 116476 Disconnect Switches product data as indicated. 2 • END OF SECTION 01300 1 I I I t lie 1 1 1 • Submittals 01300-5 ' SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the.Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Permanent utilities currently available on site for use by the Contractor include the following: ' 1. Electrical power service. 2. Water 3. Natural Gas ' C. Temporary utilities to be provided by the Contractor include, but are not limited to,the following: ' 1. Telephone • 2. Power 3. Sanitary Facilities ' D. Support facilities to be provided by the Contractor include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Temporary signs. 2. Waste disposal facilities. ' 3. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. E. Security and protection facilities to be provided'6y`the Contractor include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Environmental protection. ' 2. Stormwater control. 3. Tree and plant.protection. 4. Pest control. ' 5. Barricades,warning signs,and lights. 6. Temporary enclosures. 7. Fire protection. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Project Engineer,permanent or temporary roofing is complete, • insulated,and weathertight;exterior walls are insulated and weathertight;and all openings are closed with ' permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. TEMPORARY FACILI'T'IES AND CONTROLS 01500- 1 1 1.4 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner and shall be included in • the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost,including the ' following. 1. Owner's construction forces and personnel. , 2. Occupants of the Project. 3. Project Engineer. ' 4. Testing agencies. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6,NECA's"Temporary ElectricalFacilities,"and NFPA 241. L Electric Service: Comply with NECA,NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary ' electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. ' 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. • END OF SECTION 01500 ' I I I 1 • TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2 ' • SECTION 01700-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS S ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions ' and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the W ork inciuding, but not limited to,.the following: ' 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. ' 7. Correction of the Work B. Related Sections include the following: ' 1. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and • patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the lrt+or,. 2. Division 1 Section"Cioseout Procedures"for final cleaning. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. 2. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer,storm sewer,and water-service piping;and underground electrical services. ' 3. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates,areas,and conditions,with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other • conditions affecting performance. Record observations. ' EXECUTION,REQUIREMENTS 01700- 1 1 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: t a. Description of the Work. , b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. ' 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connectionsbeforeequiprnent.and fixture•installation. ' 4. Examine walls, floors,and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. , 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION J A Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility orOwnerthat is necessary to aajust, ' 7 move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility j appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. , B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to prcwide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: • ' 1. Notify Project Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Project Engineer's written permission_ ' C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work property. Recheck -� measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are-indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other won by field measurements before ' `1 fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. f D. Space Requirements: Verify rift'space requirements and d'rmensionsof'rtemsshown diagrammatically ' on Drawings. E. Review of Contract Documents and Feld Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Project Engineer. Include a detailed. description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT ' _i A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work,.verify layout information shown on Drawings, ' i in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered,notify i Project Engineer promptly. B. General: The General Contractor shall perform lay outwork using accepted surveying practices. 1 1. Establish benchrrrarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS .01700-2 yl 1 ' 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required • dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. ' 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Project Engineer when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements,including pavements, grading,fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. ' D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations,column-grids,and-floor levels,including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING ' A. Identification:The Contractor shall use the existing structures as benchmarks,control points,and reference points. Coordinate locations with the Contract Supervisor. ' 15 INSTALLATION ' A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. ' 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of[8 feet (2.4 m)]<Insert dimension> in spaaes without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in ' applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. hF.aintasr conditions required for product performance until Final Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. ' F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors.and-fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated,mount components at heights directed by Project Engineer. ' 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. ' G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. • ' EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-3 H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered , hazardous. • 3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to-Project site for Owner's construction forces. , B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work pefformed by Owner's construction forces. , 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual , construction progress. 2. Preinstallation. Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work ' depend on Owner's construction. STARTING AND ADJUSTING C. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning ' units, replace with new units, and retest. 0. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper ' operation. E. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. ' Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. i 3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION , A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. ..8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. I Comply with requirements in Division.1 Section"Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes repiacing defective parts,refinishing damaged surfaces,touching upwith matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-4 1 • END OF SECTION 01700 ' EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 5 SECTION 02230-SITE CLEARING AND PREPARATION • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain. 2. . Removing trees and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Topsoil stripping. 5. Removing above-grade site improvements. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 I. .Division 1 Section"Execution Requirements"for verifying utility locations and for recording fisid measurements. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary utilities, • temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection measures during site operations. 3. Division 2 Section "Earthwork"for soil materials,excavating,backfilling,and site grading. 4. Division 2 Section "Landscaping" for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and planting. 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand,silt,and clay particles; friable,pervious,and black or a darker shade ofbrown,gray,or red than underlying subsoil;reasonably free of subsoil,clay lumps,gravel,and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter;and free of weeds,roots, and other deleterious materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Record drawings according o General Conditions. g ' 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. 1.5 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP ' SITE CLEARING 02230- 1 1 A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall • become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads,streets,walks,and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without , permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. ' B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing • water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. Comply with local,state and federal , regulations. C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition,as acceptable to-Owner. ' 3? CLEARING LIMITS A. The clearing limits are five(5)feet outside the slope limits shown on the plans and five(5)feet either side Of centerline for pipe installations. B. Protect all trees not required to be removed for the project. 3.3 TREE PROTECTION ' A. If necessary for compliance with the following,erect and maintain a temporary fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups oftrees to remain.Remove fence when construction ' is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials,debris,or excavated material within drip line ofremaining trees. SITE CLEARING 02230-2 ' 2. Do not permit vehicles,equipment,or foot traffic within drip line of remaining trees. • B. Do not excavate within drip line of trees,unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 UTILITIES ' A. Existing Utilities: Locate and identify all existing utilities. Do not interrupt utilities serving &a iihies occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging ' to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Project Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Project Engineer's written permission. 3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ' A. Remove obstructions,trees,shrubs,grass,and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. Do not remove trees,shrubs,and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches oftrees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Completely remove stumps,roots,obstructions,and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. ' B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material,unless further • excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch loose depth,and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 1 3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping tupsoiL B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in.a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying ' subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials: ' C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water.. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip Iine of remaining trees. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. ' 4. Coordinate location of stockpile with Project Engineer. • 3.7 SITE I14PROVEMENTS SITE CLEARING 02230-3 A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new • construction. , B. Remove slabs,paving,curbs,gutters,and aggregate base as indicated. ' 1. Unless existing full-deptb joints coincide with line of demolition,neatly saw-cut length of existing , pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut fitces vertically. 3.8 DISPOSAL , A. Burning on Owner's Property:Burning is not permitted on Owner's property. B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials from Owner's property. ' END OF SECTION 02230 ! 1 I i I SITE CLEARING 02230-4 SECTION 02300- EARTHWORK ' PART 1 - GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes among other things the following: ' 1. Preparing subgrades. 2. Excavating and backfilling.. I ' 3. Drainage courses. 4. Base courses. 5. Subsurface drainage back-Fill.. 6. Excavating and backfiffing trenches within building lines. 7. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities arnd pi:;. -for buried utility structures. 8. Aggregate surface and shoulder courses. ' B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section 'Site Clearing' for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, and ' • protecting trees to remain. 2. Division 2 Section'Landscaping°forfinish grading,including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and plantings. ' 3. Division 3 Section °Cast-in-Place Concrete'for granular course over vapor retards- 4. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for excavating and backfiffing buiiding footings and foundations. ' 5. Division 13 Section "Pre-engineered Wood Building Systems" for excavating and backfilling building footings-and foundations. 6. Division 15 and 16 Sections for excavating and backfilling buried mechanical and eisrrrioal utilities and buried utility structures. t 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1 A. Backfill: The replacement of material to raise the ground surface to subgrade elevations around structures and utilities. ' 1. initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to* support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial back-Fill to fill a.trench. ' B. Base Course: The layer placed between the subgrade and the bottom surface of slabs-on-grade, walks, curbs and pavements. ' C. Surface Course: The surface layer placed over base or subgrade as indicated on plans. • D. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. ' EARTHWORK 02300- 1 E. Borrow: Approved soil material obtained from a designated borrow area on-site when sufficient ' approved soil material is not available from excavations. F. Surplus Excavation (Waste): Excess soil material obtained from authorized excavation. G. Soil Foundation: The prepared subgrade surface upon which fill, backfill, or base course is ' placed. H. Porous Bac fill: Course of washed granular material placed to cut off capillary flow of pore , water. I. Structures: Buildings,footings,foundations,retaining walls,slabs,tanks,curbs,mechanical and ' electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground surface. J. Utilities: Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. K. Maximum Dry Density and Optimum Moisture Content: As determined by ASTM D398 , (Standard Proctor). L. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. M. Excavation:The authorized removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. N. Fill: The placement of material to raise ground surface to subgrade elevations. , 0. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material exceeding 1 cu.yd.(0.76 cu.m)for bulk excavation or 314 cu.yd. (0.57 • ' cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: ' P. Subgrade:, The surface or elevation located immediately below base, porous backfill, drainage course,aggregate surfacing, or topsoil materials. ' Q Waste Material: Waste material includes soil contaminated by construction activities, existing trash and debris located within the construction limits, trash and debris generated by construction activities,unused construction materials not incorporated into the work and other ' unwanted materials within the construction limits as designated by the Project Engineer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A: The Contractor will perform compaction testing during the course of the work. ' 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless ' permitted in writing by Project Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: ' 1. Notify Project Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. • 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Project Engineer's written permission. ' 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. EARTHWORK 02300-2 B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be ' removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. • PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Excavation free of debris,waste,frozen materials,vegetation,other, deleterious matter and rock or gravel larger than the following ' 1. Three(3) inches (76 mm) in any dimension for backfill. ' 2. Eight(8) inches (203 mm) in any dimension for fill. 3. One(1) inch (25 mm) in any dimension for utility backfill. B. Fill and Backfill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials. ' 2.2 AGGREGATE MATERIALS A. Base Materials: Aggregate Base: MoDOT Section 1007, Type 5 aggregate(1996). B. Drainage Course and Porous Backfill: MoDOT Section 1009, Grade 3,4 or 5 course aggregate (1996). ' C. Aggregate Surfacing: MoDOT Section 1005, Course Aggregate, Gradation A(1996). • D. Clean Rock Surfacing: MoDOT Section 1005, Course Aggregate, Gradati on D (1996). ' E. Pipe Bedding Material: MoDOT Section 1007,Type 1 aggregate(1996). ' 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Provide detectable warning tape for plastic piping and regular tape for metallic piping or cabling. Acid-and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape with detectable wire as required,manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities,6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils'(0.1 mm)thick,continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored ' as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. ' E. Silt Fencing:Amoco Style 2130 or an approved equal. ' 2.4 EQUIPMENT • A. General Requirements: EARTHWORK 02300-3 1 1.. Maintain all equipment,tools,and machines used in the performance of the work required by this Section in a satisfactory working condition at all times. 2. Equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Project Engineer. ' B. Hauling Equipment: Pneumatic-tired vehicles and dump bodies suitable for dumping materials • in windrows or layers on the subgrade. ' I C. Miscellaneous Equipment: Scarifiers,tractors, spring-tooth or spike-tooth harrows, windrow equalizers,spreaders,and other equipment suitable for construction of selectmaterial base(and ' surface) course.. PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.1 PREPARATION ' -4 y A. Identify required lines,levels,contours and datum. �? B. Identify and flag all utilities. ' C. Protect structures, utilities,sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,lateral movement, undermining,washout,and other hazards created by earthwork , operations. D. Protect subgrades soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. 1 E. Provide erosion control mepsures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of j soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. F. Tree protection is specified in the Division 2 Section'Site Clearing.' i 3.2 DEWATERING -! A. Prevent surface water and ground water-from entering excavations,from ponding on prepared ' { subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. S. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water 1 accumulation. J 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewetering is no longer required. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES j A. Explosives: Explosives are not to be used on this Project site. ' 3.4 EXCAVATION,GENERAL 1 i EARTHWORK 02300-4 i J A. Classified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations classified as earth and rock. Rock excavation will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum according to the provisions for ' changes in work included in the Contract Documents. 1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; ' underground structures, utilities,and other items indicated to be removed;together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. a. Intermittent drilling; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation. 2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. 3.5 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS A Comply with federal,state and local codes, ordinances, and requirements.of authorities having jurisdiction to maintain stable excavations. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES ' A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork,for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. ' 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: a. Do not disturb bottom of excavation. ' • b. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. C. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. d. Subgrade shall be hand cleaned of all loose materials,or loose materials shouid be machine tamped into the subgrade with a tamping compactor. e. 'Back dragging"a backhoe bucket to compact loose materials and to smooth teeth marks in the subgrade will not be allowed. f. Any loose materials, soil clods or crumbs should be removed before cone,em ' placement. g. Minimize drying of subgrades due to exposure. h. In areas of fill,the fill should be placed to a level.above the top of footings and then ' excavated to allow the footing to be cast using earth forms. 2. Excavation for Underground Tanks,Basins,and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: ' Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and ' grades. 3.8 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES ' A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. • EARTHWORK 02300-5 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches t o allow in s tallation of top of pipe below ' .i frost line. See typical.pipe installation detail on Plans. 3.9 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Project Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade. ' J S. If Project Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present,continue excavation and replace with compacted baccfill,fill material or base material as directed. ' 1. Additional-excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract l provisions for changes in the Work. ' C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged.by freezing temperatures,frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Project Engineer. , I 3.10 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION -j A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation ..of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Project Engineer. ' 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Project Engineer. , i B. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide.stronger pipe, or spezial installation procedures, as required by the Project Engineer. 1 3.11 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS . � A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place,grade,and shape stockpiles to drain surface water: Cover to prevent windblown dust. i 1 E. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip sins of remaining trees. 3.12 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before-completing the following: J 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. . ' _ 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. '3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. ' 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.. S. Acceptance of construction below finish grade. 9. Verification that adjacent structures have attained sufficient strength to resist the bacicfill • and surcharge loadings without damage. EARTHWORK 02300-6 ' B. Backfill within 5 feet of structures shall be compacted with a hand held mechanical tamper. 3.13 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. General: See pipe installation detail on Plans. ' B. Place and compact bedding course. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells,joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,fittings, and bodies of conduits. ' C. Concrete backfill trenches that carry below or pass under footings and that are excavated within 18 inches (450 mm)of footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of footings. ' D. Provide 4 inch 000 mm) thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches(750-mm)below surface of roadw*s. After installation and testing,completely-encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway base. E. . Backfll shall be compacted with a hand held mechanical tamper around and over all utilities to 1 a point 2 feet(610 mm)from the edge of the utility. F. Place and compact granular bedding material surrounding the utility pipe or conduit as shown on the pipe installation details. ' 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or dispiecement of 1 utility G. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing: ' • H. Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is removed. 1. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. I ' J. install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches(300 mm)below finished grade, exce-8 inches 050 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs unless shown otherwise on the ' Plans. 3.14 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills. ' 1. Disc, or break up (scarify) soil foundation surfaces to a depth not less than 6° (152 mm) so fill material will bond with existing surface. ' 2. The Contractor shall proof-roil all soil foundations before placement of fill materials. B. When soil foundation to receive fill has a density less than that required for fill,break up ground surface to depth required,pulverize,moisture-condition or aerate soil and recompact to required 1 density. C. Place fill material in layers to required elevations. ' D. Surfaces that become too smooth or hard for adequate bonding of the next lift shall be scarified • before placing the next lift ' EARTHWORK 02300-7 E. Fill within 5 feet of structures shall be compacted with a hand held mechanical tamper. 3.15 MOISTURE CONTROL • A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequentfill or backfill layer before compaction ' within +l-3%of the optimum moisture content as required to obtain the specified compaction. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy,frozen,or contain frost or , ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet to compact to specified density. , a. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material. 3.16 COMPACTION 1 A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for ' material compacted by heavy compaction equipment,and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and , uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according ' to ASTM D 698: . 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 , inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at a5 • percent. 2. Under walkways and all other site improvements,scarify and recompact top 6 inches(150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. ' 3. Under lawn:or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent. D. Compact aggregate base, aggregate surfacing and porous backfill to not less than 95 percent , relative density as determined in accordance with ASTM D4253 and D4254. Maintain within -3 percent and +3 percent of optimum moisture content. , 3.17 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. ' Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. ' 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots,fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface ' tolerances. E. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: ' 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). • 2- Walks and Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). EARTHWORK 02300-8 C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm)when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge. • 3.18 AGGREGATE BASE, SURFACE AND SHOULDER COURSES ' A. As shown on Plans, place base, surface and shoulder course material on prepared subgrades. 1. Shape subgrade and base to required cross-slope grades. 2. When thickness of compacted base or surface course is 6 inches(150 mm)or less,place materials in a single layer, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 3. When thickness of compacted base,surface or shoulder course exceeds 6 inches (150 1 mm),place materials in equal layers,with no layer more than 6 inches(150 mm)thick or less than 3 inches(75 mm)thick when compacted. B. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct ' shoulders as shown on Plans and compact simultaneously with each subgrade and base layer. C. Delivery: 1. Excessive moisture.in aggregate delivered to site will not be permitted. The Contract Supervisor will visually inspect each load prior to dumping. Loads with a moisture content above that allowed for compaction will be rejected. ' D. Stockpiles: ' 1. Stockpile only with approval of the Contract Supervisor. 2. Clear and level storage sites prior to stockpiling. 3. Place in a manner and at locations designated by the Contract Supervisor providing ' separate stockpiles for materials from separate sources. • 4. Prevent aggregatefrom segregating during placement,storage,and handling atstockpiies. E. Cold-Weather Limitations: ' 1. Base, surface and shoulder course construction shall be prohibited when atmospheric temperature is below 35 degrees Fahrenheit unless permitted otherwise by the Proie Engineer. 2. Do not place base or surface courses on wet or frozen subgrade. 3. Protect base,surface and shoulder courses and subgrade in freezing weather and repair areas damaged by freezing by reshaping.and recompacting prior to placing pavements. 1 F. Preparation of Subgrade: 1. Clean off all foreign substances which includes, but not limited to,debris,roots, organic matter, refuse,ashes, cinder,and rock with any dimension greater than 3 inches. 2. Correct any ruts or soft yielding spots or any areas with inadequate compaction, by removing material and replacing with properly compacted fill or course granular base. 3. Contract Supervisor will inspect for adequate compaction and surface tolerances prior to placing aggregate base. 1 G. Placing: ' 1. General: • EARTHWORK 02300-9 1 a. Deposit and spread material in a uniform layer and compact to the thickness indicated and as specified. Spread material uniformly on the prepared subgrade , from moving vehicles or spreader boxes. • b. level material to the required contour and grades. C. Remove those portions of the layer which become segregated or mixed with , subgrade material in spreading and replace with new material. d. Hauling which may damage the subgrade or surfacing will be restricted. e. Remove and repair subgrade damaged during application of the aggregate base material. H. Shaping and Compacting Materials: 1. Compact in layers no less than 3 nor more than 6 inches thick. , 2. Roll to specified compaction requirements throughout full depth of layer with power rollers. 3. Shape and smooth by blading and rolling with power roller. 4. Hand tamp in places not accessible to rolling equipment 5. Degree of compaction shall be as follows: a. Compact base, surface and shoulder courses at optimum moisture content to , required grades,lines, cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM D4254 relative density, , b. Remove or scarify and recompact materials failing to meet required densities.. C. Removal of in-place material and replacement with approved new material will be required if scarifying and recompaction do not produce the required densities. ' 6. Smoothness Test: a. . Finished surfaces shall not vary more that +J 0.04 foal from the elevations ' °1 indicated on the Plans. S b. Correct any deviation in excess of this amount by loosening, adding or removing material,reshaping,watering, and compacting. ' L Maintenance: 1. Maintain finished base or surface courses in a condition as required by the Contract Documents. 2. Repair or replace base or surface courses not satisfying the Contract requirements. l 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Allow Contract Supervisor to inspect and test each subgrade,fill,backfill,base,surface I and shoulder layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. 1. Field in-place density tests shall be performed by the Contract Supervisor' using the I nuclear method according to ASTM D2922. H. When Contract Supervisor reports that subgrades, fills, backfills or base courses are below specified density,scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil or base to the depth required, recompact and retest until required density is obtained. 3.20 PROTECTION • i EARTHWORK 02300- 10 ' A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic,freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. ' B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed • surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. ' 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Project Engineer; reshape and recompact. ' C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses,remove finished surfacing,baciTeli with additional soil.material., compact, and reconstruct-surfacing. ' 1. Restore appearance,quality,and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent wo-,V- and eliminate evidence of Testoi anon to the greatest extent-possible. END OF SECTION 02300 1 • 1 1 .. 1 • EARTHWORK 02300- 11 i SECTION 02900-LANDSCAPING T1 -GENERAL • PAR 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I 1. Lawns. -2. Topsoil and soil amendments. 3. Fertilizers and mulches. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 'I 1. Division 2 Section 'Site Clearing' for protection of existing trees and planting, topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing. 2. Division 2 Section °Earthwork° for excavation, filling, rough grading, and subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backffll. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. • B. Product certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that their products complywith specified requirements. 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products. 2. Analysis for other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. 1 C. Certification of grass seed from seed vendor for each grass-seed mixture stating the botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity,germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. D. Labels from seed containers. ' 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site. S. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers. C. Fertilizer: Deliver Fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis and name of manufacturer. • 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 LANDSCAPING 02900- 1 1 A. Utilities: Determine location of above grade and underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes until , removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. B. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered,such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Project Manager before planting. , 1.6 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required. 1.7 LIMITS , A. The Contractor shall seed all areas of exposed earth that have been disturbed by construction operations unless otherwise stated. , PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GRASS MATERIALS , A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with the Association of Official Seed Analysts'°Rules for Testing Seeds"for purity and germination tolerances. , 1. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight, and minimum percentages of purity,germination,and maximum percentage of weed seed as ' indicated on Schedules at the and of this Section. 2. Comply with the state seed laws of the State of Missouri. 2.2 TOPSOIL • ' A. Topsoil: Free of stones 2 inch (50 mm) or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous , materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods,stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. , 2.3 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602,Class T, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium ' carbonate equivalent, with a minimum 99 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing a No. 60(250 micrometer) sieve. , 1. Provide lime in the form of dolomitic limestone. B. Water: Potable. , 2.4 FERTILIZER A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete.fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of ' fast-and slow-release nitrogen,50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea form, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: Nitrogen - 12%, phosphoric acid- 18% and soluble potash -24%. • LANDSCAPING 02900-2 ' PART 3-EXECUTION 1; 3.1 EXAMINATION • A. Examine areas to receive landscaping for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting performance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION A. Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. ' B. Apply soil amendments on surface of topsoil and mix thoroughly before planting. 1. Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing fertilizer. Prevent lime from contacting roots of acid- tolerant plants. 2.. Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before.tilling. 3. A°Planting Soil Amendments Schedule" is included at the end of this Section. 1l 3.3 LAWN PLANTING PREPARATION A. Limit subgrade preparation to areas that will be planted in the.immediate future. E. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Remove stones larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish,and other extraneous materials. C. Spread planting soil mixture to 6° minimum to bring surfaces to grades depth and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is 'j • frozen. 1. Place approximately '/z the thickness of planting soil mixture required. Work into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil mixture. D. Grade lawn and grass areas to a smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll j and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. Remove trash, debris, stones larger than 1=1/2 inches (38 mm) in any dimension, and other objects that may interfere with planting or 'i maintenance operations. Z E. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting when soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. F. Restore prepared areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and before planting. ' 3.4 SEEDING NEW LAWNS A. Sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind 1 velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in 2 J directions at right angles to each other. �i 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage. J B. Sow seed at the following rates: J ,� LANDSCAPING 02900-3 1. Seeding Rate: 8 lb per 1000 sq.ft. (4 kg per 100 sq. m). C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of topsoil, roll lightly,and water after mulching with ' fine spray. D. Protect all other seeded areas against erosion by spreading straw mulch after completion of , seeding operations. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons per acre (45 kg per 100 sq. m)to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower,or other suitable equipment. ' 1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into topsoil by suitable mechanical equipment. 3.5 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION ' A. During landscaping, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect landscaping from damage due to landscape operations,operations by other contractors ' and trades,and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed. ' 3.6 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove waste materials, including unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally , dispose of it off the Owner's property. 3.7 PLANTING SOIL AMENDMENTS SCHEDULE ' A. 'Lawns: Provide soil amendments in not less than the following quantities: 1. Weight of lime per 1000 sq.ft. (100 sq. m): 115 lbs. , 2. Weight of commercial fertilizer per 1000 sq.ft. (100 sq. m): 10 lbs. • 3.8 SEED MDCfURES SCHEDULE ' A. Seed Mixture: Provide certified grass-seed blends or mixes,proportioned by weight, as follows: Seeding Min. Min. Max. , Rate per Pct. Pct. Pct. Proportion Name 1000 so.ft. Germ. Pure Sd. Weed Sd. , 25% Fine Blade Turf Fescue 2 Ibs./ft2 90 95 0.50 (Jaguar) 25% Fine Blade Turf Fescue 2 Ibs./ft2 90 95 0.50 , (Hound dog) 25% Fine Blade Turf Fescue 2 Ibs.V 90 95 0.50 (Rebel 11) ' 21.875% Annual Rye 1.75 Ibs./ft2 .90 95 0.50 3.125% Buffalo(609) .25 Ibs./ft2 90 95 0.50 - END OF SECTION 02900 1 LANDSCAPING 02900-4 ' 1 . SECTION 02910 - LAWN SEEDING SPECIFICATIONS ' PAR 1 - T GENERAL '. 1 .1 Scope of Work A. Furnish all materials, tools, equipment, and labor for preparation of the seed bed and seeding the lawn areas ' as shown on the plans and specified herein. All areas to be sodded are shown on the drawing. All other areas disturbed by construction, which are not shown as sod, ' are to be seeded. 1 .2 Submittals A. When requested by the owner or owner' s representative, submit samples of all materials for approval. Submit seeding schedule before beginning of construction. Show ' coordination of normal planting times with construction schedule, and other related work. Submit . tags from seed mixtures showing percentages of seed types, weed seed and inert matter. 1. 3 Seasons for Seeding A. The season for seeding shall be from April 1 to May 15 and August 15 to October 30. The actual seeding of lawns shall be done, however, only during periods ,. within this season which are normal for such work as determined by weather conditions and by accepted practice in the locality of the project and which are approved by the Architect. Only upon written instructions by the Architect may planting begin earlier or continue later than the dates specified. ' B. The preparation of lawn areas to be seeded may begin as soon as the area is designated by the Owner's Representative. �. 1 . 4 Related Sections A. .Section 02301 Topsoil. PART 2 - PRODUCTS. 2. 1 Materials A. Commercial Fertilizer: shall meet the following ' requirements : 99811 SEEDING 02930-1 1. Shall be a complete fertilizer containing in � - available form by weight a minimum of 100 , nitrogen, 10% phosphoric acid and 10% potash, a minimum of 50% of nitrogen to be derived from natural organic materials in a slow release form, ' of a neutral character. 2 . The fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in -� the original unopened containers which shall bear the manufacturer' s guaranteed statement of analysis. Fertilizer shall be stored in a weatherproof place in such a manner that it shall , be kept dry and its effectiveness will not be impaired. 2 .2 Seed Bed Materials A. Agricultural Limestone: shall be a finely ground ' limestone rock, containing a minimum of a combined total of "calcium and magnesium carbonate equivalent" ' of from 85 to 90%. All the material shall pass a 3/16" screen, approximately 90% shall pass a #8 screen and approximately 15 to 20% shall pass a #100 screen. B. Water: The Contractor will furnish water at the project site as required for the execution of all work until all work has been completed. ~' C. Topsoil. The Contractor shall insure that sufficient topsoil is incorporated into the seed bed to guarantee satisfactory turf growth. See Section 02301 Topsoil . , 2.3 Seeding Materials ' A. Grass Seed: 1 . Grass seed shall be fresh, clean, new-crop seed. , The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner' s Representative the dealer.'s guaranteed statement of the composition of the mixture and the , percentage of purity and germination of each variety, for approval prior to seeding. 2 . Grass seed shall be composed of the following ' varieties which shall be mixed in the proportions and sown at the rate specified. 99811 SEEDING 02930-2 • a. Low Maintenance Mix Purity Germination Rate Tall Fescue 95% 90% 30#/ac Red Top 90.% 80% 7#/ac Oats or Wheat 95% Varies ' 30#/ac B. Straw: Shall be threshed straw of hay; oats, wheat, barley, or rye not chopped in short lengths . C. Mulch Over.spray Tackifier: to be a slick-paper mulch overspray product that meets Illinois Highway ' Department Standards. D. Erosion Control Blanket: shall be a machine produced '. mat of 100% agricultural straw covered with photodegradable . polypropylene netting top and bottom and sewn together with cotton thread. Blanket to be North American Green 5150 or approved equivalent. E. Permanent Erosion Control Mat: Shall be a flexible, non-woven mat of randomly oriented Ultra Violet (U.V. ) '_ • stabilized Polyvinylchloride (PVC) monofilaments thermally welded together into a three-dimensional; porous web. . Mat to be Pec-Mat by Greenstreak, Miramat by Mirafil, Inc. , or approved equivalent. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 Seedbed Preparation A. Repair any eroded areas and make minor grading adjustments to provide good drainage and to meet grade at all walks and paved surfaces. B. Spread ground limestone over all areas to be seeded at the rate of 50 lbs per 1000 s. f. (2200. lbs per acre) ' with an approved vehicular spreader. C. Spread commercial grade 10-10-10 fertilizer over all areas to be seeded at the rate of 15 lbs per 1000 s. f. (650 lbs per acre) with an approved spreader. D. Disc and harrow or otherwise cultivate all area thoroughly in at least two directions to thoroughly mix • 99811 SEEDING 02930-3 i the above fertilizers into the soil to a depth of 3" • (inches) . Drag lawn areas with approved equipment to , insure a smooth surface to all lawn areas. Surface shall be cleaned of all stones larger than one inch, and of all existing vegetation, roots, brush, wire, grade stakes, and other objects. E. Inspection:- The Owner' s Representative shall be notified upon completion of seedbed preparation to , examine and approve the grading and soil preparation and condition prior to start of seeding operations. 3.2 Seeding , A. Sow grass seed by mechanical spreaders of approved ' type, doing the work in two operations at right angles , to each other. B. Keep mulch and seed out` of plant beds and off of walks, , structures, and areas not to be seeded. Clean up these areas to satisfaction of the Architect (Owner' s Representative) . ' C. Roll the seeded areas to firmly bed the seed and then spread threshed straw on the seeded areas at the rate of two (2) tons (dry weight) per acre or hydro-mulch • according to manufacturer' s recommendations. It shall be spread evenly and without damage to the seeded area. D. on areas with slopes of 3:1 (3 horizontal: 1 vertical) or less, use a cultipac to crimp straw into soil or a slick-paper mulch overspray to tack straw.. The slick- ' paper . mulch overspray shall be mixed and applied according to Missouri Highway ,Department standards. E. On designated slopes of 3 : 1 or greater, as indicated on ' the drawings, and swale areas, use an approved erosion control blanket over the seeded area. The erosion control blanket shall be installed and staked according to manufacturer' s specifications. F. On the bank areas of the retention ponds, at four (4) feet above and below the proposed water level. as indicated on the drawings, use an approved permanent erosion control mat over the seeded area. The erosion , control mat shall be installed and secured according to manufacturer's specifications. G. Hydro-seeding will be acceptable upon submission of ' information related to mulch material, mixture, 99811 SEEDING 02930-4 • • equipment, and personnel performing the work by the ' contractor and approval by the Owner' s Representative. 3 . 3 Reseeding ' A. Bare patches or washouts due to heavy rains prior to establishment and acceptance of the new turf shall be regraded as needed, scratched, reseeded, rolled and watered, or sodded, as often as may be necessary as herein specified at Contractor' s expense. B. The intention of the contract is to plant a first-class stand of grass . Acceptance of seeded areas shall be only when sufficient growth insures that a good stand of grass will protect the lawn areas from erosion. ' This shall be in not less than thirty (30) days following completion. ' 3 . 4 Maintenance And Guarantee: A. Protection - Protection shall begin immediately after each portion of the work is completed by the Contractor. Contractor shall use metal fence stakes and one-fourth (1/4) inch diameter ropes or #10 gauge galvanized wire as necessary to show areas where no trespassing is permitted during the rest of his or other Contractors' operations or after completion of the work. Brightly colored plastic flagging shall be tied to wire to make its presence known. B. The maintenance of the seeded turf areas shall be the Contractor' s responsibility until the new grass is 4 ' inches high and thick enough to receive its first mowing by the Owner. Contractor shall water as necessary and reseed bare spots which are larger than one square foot in size. Contractor shall protect seeded areas by watering, fertilizing, removing weeds, and reseeding as necessary, for a uniform stand of established grass and until approved - by the Owner' s Representative. C. Guarantee - The Contractor shall guarantee the production of a close stand of the specified species of. grass, acceptable to the Owner' s . Representative. All repairs and reseeding are to be done as part of this Contract and at no extra cost to the Owners. END OF SECTION • 99811 SEEDING 02930-5 1 SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. I, 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete,including formwork,reinforcement,concrete materials.mix design,placement procedures,and finishes. B. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following: 1. Foundations and footings. 2. Slabs-on-grade 3. Walkways and pavements. 4. Other miscellaneous concrete. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 13 Section"Metal Building Systems"for building footings and foundations. I!, • 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement,fly ash and other po=olans,ground granulated blast-furnace slag,and silica fume. 1.4 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data. For each type manufactured and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, I; project conditions,weather, test results,or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Include laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test This shall include compressive test results for a minimum of three cylinders. 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication,bending,and placement,prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material,grade,bar schedules, stirrup spacing,bent bar diagrams, arrangement,and supports of concrete reir[orcemem Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Joint layout drawing showing locations of all joints for each item of work. 1. Joints for slabs-on-grade shall include all high stress points. - 2. Joints shall be spaced a maximum of 36 times the thickness of the slab(18'for a 6"slab). • 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE i CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1 A. Installer cations: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, Q�� �� mP design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in constriction with a record of successful in-service performance. , B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in mamifacdmng ready-mixed concrete products • complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production faalides and appment , C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same marrufacdn er s plant,each aggregate from.one source,and each admixture from the same manufacturer. D. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, , except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following,unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301,-Specification for Structural Concrete.- 2. ACI 318,-Building CodeRequirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. ACI 117,-Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials:" 4. Concrete Remforcing Steel Institute(CRSn"Manual of Standard Practice." 5. American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) IESNA Standard 90.1. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ' 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS , A_ Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as • , follows: a. HighAensity overlay,Class 1,or better. ' B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, mil, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit . 1. Plywood,metal,or other approved panel materials. C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with nest inlnbitor for steel form-facing materials. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615K Grade 60(Grade 420),deformed. , B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185,fabricated from as-drawn steel wine into flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A_ Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastermig reiriforcing bars and wedded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's"Manual • of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete,and as follows: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 ' 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. ' B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615K Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to • length with ends square and free of burrs. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS '. A Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, M II, III, or V, or a blended hydraulic .cement (ASTM C 595K Type 1): 1. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989,Grade 100 or 120. 2. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240,amorphous silica B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33,uniformly graded,and as follows: 1. Class: Severe weathering region,4S. 2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches(38 mm). 3. Do not use aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. C. Water. Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. '1 2.5 ADMIXTURES A General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to aontam not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. ,:i • C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A- D. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type F. 1i E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type E. F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type D. 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A Vapor Retarder. ASTM E 1745, Class C, of one of the following materials; or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397,not less than 10 mils(0.25 mm)total thicimess: 1� 1. Nonwoven,polyester-reinforced;polyethylene coated sheet; 10 mils(0.25 mm)thick 2. Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, laminated, high-density polyethylene sheet; 7.8 mils(0.18 mm)thick. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A Evaporation Retarder. Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. ' B. Abs o a Cover. AASHTO M 182, Class 2, b cloth made from or kenaf, weighing • rF�' � J� approximately 9 oz./sq.yd. (305 g/sq.m)dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171,polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3) D. Water. Potable. E. Clear,Waterborne,Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,Type 1, Class B. ' 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS • 1 A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751,asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059,Type II,non-redispersrble,acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene, C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM'C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surbces,of class and grade to suit requirements.and as follows: ' 1. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened , concrete.\ D. Sealing Compound: Clear,Waterborne,Membrane-Forming Sealing Compound: ASTM c 309,Type 1, Class B. , E. Foundation Insulation: Provide a 24 inch high layer of extruded polystyrene board insulation with a thermal ice value of R-8 installed vertically around the outside perimeter of the foundation wall at ' such a depth that the top of the board is 3 inches below grade as specified per ASH AE/IESNA STANDARD 90.1. _ F. Joint Sealants: Dow Corning 888 or an approved equal.. -' 2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS , A Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement4med, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be • applied in thiclmesses from 1/4 inch(6 mm). 1. Cement Binder. ASTM C 150, pordand cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as ' defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate,conditions,and application. ' 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 .mm) or.coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength Not less than 5700 psi (39 MPa).at 28.days when tested according to ASIM C 109/C 109M. , 2.10 CONCRETE MIXES ' A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases,as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. , B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the , laboratory trial mix basis. C. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 4500 psi(31 MPa). , 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches(100 mm). 3. Maximum Slump for Concrete Contam ag High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 8 inches (200 mm)after admixture is added to concrete with 2-to 4-inch(50-to 100-mm)slump. ' D. Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 ' 1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 4000 psi(27.6 MPa). 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches(100 mm). ' E. Maximum Water-Cemen itious Materials Ratio: 0.45. F. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious 1 materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 and ACI 318 requirements. G. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Air Content 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch-(38-mm-)nominal maximum aggregate size. 1, 2_ Air Content: 6 percent for 1-inch-(25-mm-)nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air Content 6 percent for 314-inch-(19-mm-)nominal maximum aggregate size. 1 Ii Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent L. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplastici=) in concrete,as required,for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatues,low humidity,or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs,concrete required to be watertight,and concrete with a water-cementitious 1, maenads ratio below 0.50. 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A- Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSrs"Manual of Standard Practice." 1 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING 1 A Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116,and furnish batch ticket information. 1. C) When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg Q.reduce mixing and delivery 1 time from 1-12 hours to 75 minutes,when air temperature is above 90 deg F(32 deg Q. red= mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 1 2. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number,date,mix type,mix time,quantity,any admixtures and amount of water added. 1� PART 3 -EXECUTION 1 ' 3.1 GENERAL 1 A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials,vapor barrier.and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 1 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5. A. Proof-roll base surface to check for unstable areas and need for additional compaction. ' prepared verify mpac*r Do not begin work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive concrete. B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 1 3.3 FORMWORK , A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can ' support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and ' position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities,designated by ACI 3478 as abrupt or gradual,as follows: 1. Concrete exposed to view-Class A, 1/8 inch(3 mm). ' 2. Concrete not exposed to view-Class C,1/2 inch(13 mm). D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. ' E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Kerf wood inserts for forming , keyways,reglets,recesses,and the like,for easy removal. .1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. -' F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off ' templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. -1. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets,bloddng, screeds,and bulkheads required in ' the Work Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. I. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other ' debris just before placing concrete. 1. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as regrmed,to prevent mores leaks and m mtam ' proper alignment K Coat contact surfaces of forms with form release agent,according to mamffactur&s written instructions, before placing reinforcement. ' L. Earthen Forms: Footings may be cast using earthen forms. 3.4 EMBEDDED rTEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is ' attached to or supported by cast in place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, insnnctions.and directions fwnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor bolts,accurately located.to elevations required. ' 3.5 PREPARING FORM SURFACES ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6. ' A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved.nonresidual, form-coating compound before placing reinforcement ' B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place • concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions. ' 1. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining,rust-preventative material. Rust-seamed steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.6 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work,that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at.not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided cmmg and protection operations are maintained. ' B. Clean and rePair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form--release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Project Engineer. 3.7 DRAINAGE COURSE INSTALLATOION A. General: Place a minimum of a 4°thick aggregate drainage course under all building slabs. '' • 3.8 VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Place vapor barrier sheeting in position under all building slabs over the top of the aggregate drainage course. Place with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. Place in two directions if using two layers of vapor barrier. ' B. Vapor Retarder Place, protect and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. ' C. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic or press-sensitive tape. 3.9 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement 1: Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,earth,ice,and other foreign materials. 1i. C.. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to gnantam minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars • D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection Arrange,space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in _position daring concrete placement operations. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7 E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete,not toward exposed concrete surfaces. F. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap , edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. • 3.10 JOINTS 1 A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct ' transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless indicated otherwise. When joining existing or previously installed work,place joints to align with previously placed joints,unless instructed otherwise. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations ' indicated-or as-approved by Project Engineer. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement Continue reinforcement arms construction , joints,unless otherwise indicated 2. Form from bulkhead forms with treys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches(38 mm)into concrete. ' 3. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors,slabs,beams,and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where flesh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. t C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated.. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-sixth of concrete ' thickness,as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joins with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joins 1/8-inch-(3-mm-)wide by 1/6 of the slab depth into concrete. Saw the joints at a time when cutting action will not tear,abrade,or otherwise damage surFac:e and ' before concrete develops random contraction cracks. • 2. Location and Spacing: Locate joints as follows: a. Walkways: If contraction joints are not shown, the joint spacing shall be approximately ' equal to the width of the walkway and at equal spacing between transitions. Maximum spacing shall be 8 ft-. b. Floor Slabs: If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 18 & in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible(at column centerimes, , halfbays,third bays). D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install join.-filler strips at slab junctions ' with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated I. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch(12 mm)or more than 1 inch(25 mm) ' below finished concrete surface where join sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants,"are applicable. 2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. ' E. Dowel Joins: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. , 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint ' 2. Use doweled joints where aprons and walkways intersect building construction. • 3. Space 2'x./s7 dowels as indicated or 2'maximum ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 ' 3.11 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS ' A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other • work that is attached to or supported by cast.-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions,and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached. ' B. Place and secure anchorage devices and_ other embedded items required for adjoining worm that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions.and directions furnished with items to be embedded Install anchor bolts,accurately located,to elevations required. C. -- Forms for'Slabs:--Set"edge forms;bulkheads,-and intermediate-screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using ' strike-off templates or compactmg4ype screeds. ' 3.12 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A General: Comply with ACI 304,"Guide for Measuring,Mixing,Transporting,and Placing Concrete," ' and as specified B. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. C. Remove snow, ice or first from subbase surface and reinforcing before placing eandrete. Do not place concrete on surfaces that are frozen D. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment ' • E. Befam placing concrete,water maybe added at Project site,subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing adrabdures to mix- F. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously,,ly,provide eonstruction joins as specified Deposit concrete to avoid segregation G. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened surfaces H Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a marmer to avoid inclined construction joints Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. ' 1. Consolidate P laced concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 3091 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectrveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower lavers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded without causing mix constituents to segregate. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of • construction joints,until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around '. reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on cbairs daring concrete placement ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and shrike off to correct elevations. ' 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface , plane,free of humps or hollows,before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further dishub slab surfaces before starting fnishm operations. I. Cold-Weather Placement Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect.concrete work from physical ' damage or reduced strength that could be caused by fi+ost,freezing actions,or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly , heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture tempera ft=of not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C)and not more than SO deg F(27 deg C)at point of placement.. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifiecze agents or chemical accelerators,unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. K Hot-Weather Placement Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, , when hot-weather conditions exist 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperance below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at ' time of placement Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. ' 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade _ moisture uniform without standing water,soft spots,or dry areas. ' 3.13 FMSHING FORMED SURFACES ' A. Schedule: • 1. Surfaces that will not be exposed to public view or receive any further covering or coating shall receive a rough-formed finish , 2. Surfaces that will be exposed to public view or that are to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting snail receive a smooth-formed finish and a smooth-rubbed finish , B. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified ' C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth formed finished concrete: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish Not later than one day after form removal,moisten concrete surfaces and ' rub with carborrmdum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the robbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls,horizontal offsets,and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, smlm off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces..unless otherwise indicated. 3.14 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS , A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302AR for screeding, resnaightening, and finishing • operations for cep surfaces Do not wet concrete surfaces. ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033©0-10 1 B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float ' passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture free of trowel • marks. Finish to a tolerance of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in 10foot as determined with a 10 foot straight edge placed anywhere on the slab,in any direction(ACI Class A tolerance). ' 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel or broom finish C. Trowel Finish After applying float finish,apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or ' power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restimghten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. ' 1 Apply a trowel finish all fl oor including mg all fl o or and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane,paint,or another thin film-finish coating system 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot- (3.05-m-)long straightedge,resting on two high spots and placed anywhere '. on the surface,does not exceed the following- a. 1/8 inch(3.2 mm). D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps,and elsewhere as ' indicated. 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Slightly.roughen trafficked surface by drawing a soft ' bristle broom across concrete surface perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Project Engineer before application. ' • 3.15 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE rIEMS A. Fulling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures,unless otherwise indicated,after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and came concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work- B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. '. 3.16 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. ' Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot; dry, or windy ' conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h(1 kg/sq.m x h)before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete,but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If ' removing forms before end of caring period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following _. • methods: D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after fmishmg concrete. Cure unformed.surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-11 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: ' a. water. • b. Continuous water-fog spray. , C. Absorptive cover,water saturated,and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch(300-mm)lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for , curing concrete,placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof , tape- 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by-power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours , after initial application. Maintain continuity of dating and repair damage during curing period. E. Sealed Concrete: Seal all exposed concrete floors within the building after they are enclosed and all other construction operations that would damage floor finish are completed Apply a minim of two coats as , recommended by the miser and as necessary to produce a high gloss sheen 1. Caring and Sealing Compound. Apply uniformly to floors and slabs mclicated in a continuous Operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remat areas ' subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during acing period- JOINT FILLING P Prepare,clean,and install joint filler according to manudwturer's written instructions. • ' 1. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. ' B. Remove dirt debris,saw cuttings. curing compounds,and sealers from joints;leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Project Engineer. Remove and ' replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Project Engineer's approval. B. Patching Mortar. Mix dry-pack patching mortar,consisting of one part pordand cement to two and one- ' half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and Pte►g. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air , bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discoloration that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock.pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has ' dried Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard • porFland cement so that,when dry,patching mortar wiH match surrounding color. Patch a test area ' at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and.color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-12 ; , 1' 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability.and structural performance as determined by Project Engineer. ' D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify sur6ce tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness;use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls,popouts,honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to ' reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high auras by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment Prepare, ' mix and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufactur&s written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane,.and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare,mix and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written insmrcrions to produce a smooth,uniform,plane,and level surface. ' 6. Repair defective areas,except random cracks and single holes 1 inch(25 mm)or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. .Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. ' • 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch(25 mm)or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose- particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Project Engineer's approvaL using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and.installation not specified above may be used,subject to Project Engineer's approval. 1 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A General: During the progress of construction,tests will be made by the Contract Supervisor to determine whether the concrete conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Test specimens shall be considered representative of the concrete from the batch in which they are taken. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following,as directed- by Project Engineer. 1. All test cylinders shall be tested at an independent testing lab selected by the Project Engineer. 2. Test cylinders shall be taken in sets of four,unless it is requested by the Contractor that additional cylinders be taken. The four cylinders are reserved for use by the Project Engineer,for standard 7 and 28 day compressive strength test. At the Contractor's option and expense,additional cylinders may be taken. Before requesting the taking of any extra cylinders.the Contractor must execute an agreement with the testing lab to pay directly for all storage and testing of all extra cylinders. The • Contractor shall then request in writing to the Project Engineer that additional cylinders be taken. The Contractor should also specify in his letter, the areas of concrete work for which the extra '. cylinders should be taken and the member of extra cylinders requested It will be the Contractor's responsri»lity to coordinate with the testing lab the date and time for testing any extra cylinders. 3. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172,except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-13 a. Slump: ASTM C 143; a minimum of one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete;additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed b. Air Content: ASTM C 173,volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; , ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; a minimum of one for each Ws pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. C. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; a minimum of one test hourly when air , temperature is 40 deg F and below,when 80 deg F and above,and one test for each set of compressm-stmagth specimens. d Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each ' compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cared test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required as directed by the Project Engineer. e. Slump,air content and temperature test shall be performed for each set of cylinders. ' 4. Test remits will be reported in writing to Project Engineer,ready-mix producer, and Contractor. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and mrmber, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, lotion of concrete batch in structure,design compressive strength at 28 days,concrete mix proportions and , materials,compressive breaking strength,and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. 5. Nondestructive Testing Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other wive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. ' 1 • 1 1 • CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-14 ' Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/97 • 3.20 LOW STRENGTH CONCRETE ' A. When a 7-day test specimen for a particular pour has a brealdng strength of less than 75%of the required minimum compressive strength, the concrete represented by the 7-day specimen.will be classified as potential low-strength concrete. If any 28-day strength test (average of two cylinders) falls below the required minimum compressive strength by more than 500 psi, the concrete represented by those cylinders shall be classified as low-strength concrete. ' B. Iiy in the opinion of the Project Engineer, low-strength concrete impairs the proper.function of the structure,the Owner will require,at the Comma tors expense,replacement of the portions of the structure where low-strength concrete was placed. C. The Contractor shall have the opportunity to prove the concrete meets the specified strength by taidng drilled cores. Three cores will be required for each strength test more than 500 psi below the required ' minimum compressive strength. Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be considered structurally adequate if the average of the three cores is equal to at least 85 11a,and if no single core is less than 75% of the required minimum compressive snmkgdL Obtaining and gong drilled cores shall comply with ASTM C42. All costs associated with the drilled cores shall be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 03300 1 . • ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 15 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05100 • SECTION 042000-UNIT MASONRY _ PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units(CMUs). ' 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Pre-faced concrete masonry units. 4. Concrete brick. 5. Face brick. 6. Building(common)brick. 7. Hollow brick. 8. Glazed Structural-clay facing tile. B. See Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel [lintels] [and] [shelf angie4? for unit masonry. ' C. See Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and True" for furnishing manufactured r=icts installed in masonry joints for metal flashing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit sason,71 reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315,"Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement". C. Samples for each type and color of brick and mortar. D. Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. 1. For masonry units include material test reports substantiating compliance with ' requirements. E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated,provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and UNIT MASONRY 042000- 1 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05105) , inspecting agency,by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means,as acceptable i to authorities having jurisdiction. ' 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS. , A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost I or by freezing conditions. ]. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ' ACI 530.1/ASCE VMS 602. PART 2-PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: ' 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, ' manufacturers specified- 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. ' 2.2 COLORS,TEXTURES,AND PATTERNS A. Exposed Masonry Units: As selected by Owner. ' 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs) A. Shapes: Provide special shapes for lintels, corners,jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, , bonding,and other special conditions. 2.4 LINTELS A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, at Contractor's option, complying with requirements below. ' B. Concrete Lintels: Precast units matching concrete masonry units and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. UNIT MASONRY 042000-2 i Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02(R 05/05) • C. Concrete Licrtels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requmremens in Division 03 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1 D. Masonry Lintels: Made from bond beam concrete masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. i ' 2.5 BRICK ' A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces,provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in ' sawed surfaces being exposed to view. 2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS ' A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 T I or ex Type III may be used for cold-weer Type � � YP Y ' construction. B. Mortar Pigments: Iron oxides and chromium oxides,compounded for use m mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS ' A. Materials: ' 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 1531' Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008K Commercial Sw—.1, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. ' 3. . Steel Plates, Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or ' horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing,where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated,complying with Division 07 Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm)into ' wall and 1/2 inch out from wall,with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed]. • 2. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on UNIT MASONRY 042000-3 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/05) itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 3. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from to shapes indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL , A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motor-driven saws;provide clean,sharp,unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and,where possible, cut edges concealed. ' B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. , C. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/I'MS 602 and with the following: 1. . For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints,do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels,sills,parapets, and reveals, do not vary , from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS • , A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and ofr'sets. ' Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Patten for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in , running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. , C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar,unless otherwise indicated. E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,posts,and similar items,unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING ' A. Lay hollow brick as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. , 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers,columns,and pilasters. • UNIT MASONRY 042000-4 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02(R 05/05) ' 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. ' 4.. With entire units, including areas under cells,fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufiizient ' mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joie or slush head joints. ' 3.4 CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured,clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning ethods on le wall 1; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for eamng � P� P comparison purposes. 1 2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. ' 4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 5. -Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacmre's ' written instructions. • 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. r END OF SECTION 042000 y • r UNIT MASONRY 042000-5 i SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY I PART 1 -GENERAL. I 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber, 2. Framing with engineered wood products. t 3. Wood blocking and milers. 4. Utility shelving. 5. Wood fusing and grounds. 6. Sheathing and Subflooring. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 1.3 DEFINMONS ' A. Rough n work not specified in other Sections and not gh Carp try: Carpentry sp exposed, unless otherwise indicated. 1 B. Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction. C. Lumber grading agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference them,include the following: 1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manuh=rers Association. 2. NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority, 3. RIS-Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB- Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. W WPA-Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels;place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2-PRODUCTS • ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 1 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS,GENERAL A Lumber. DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber gradmg agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. ' 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or 1 back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry ' lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber,S4S,unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide dry.lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture comet at time of dressing for _^-inch nominal(38-mm actual)thickness or less,unless otherwise indicate& , B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance ' with building code in effect for Project 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses,as published by manufacturer,that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values ' shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing po formed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Wood Structural Panels: ' 1. Plywood: DOC PS 2. 2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. 3. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated. . 4. Comply with"Code Plus"provisions in APA Form No.E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential&Commercial" ' 5. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS ' A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground or concrete and is continuously protected from liquid water. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and the following: a. Chromated copper arsenate(CCA). ' 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish,use chemical formulations that do not require incising,contain colorants,bleed through,or otherwise adversely affect finishes. , B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ' American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each , piece, or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection • agency. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 ' D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings,and the following: APP &5 g 1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with t masonry or concrete. 2. Wood framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade, exposed to weather or exposed to water. Wood floor plates and base boards that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. t2.3 DDAENSION LUMBER A General: Provide dimension-lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards ' Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated- B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction,Sind,or No.2 grade and the following species: I. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. C. All other framing including Load-Bearing Walls and Ceiling Joists: Constriction or No.2 grade and the ' following species: 1. Southern pine; SPIB. ' 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction,including the following- 1. Blocking. • 2. Cants. 3. Nailers. 4. Furring. ' 5. Grounds. B. For exposed boaitis, concealed boards, and items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, ' or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. ' C. For furring strips for installing plywood, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to panel: ' 2.5 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS ' 2.6 SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing. Exterior,Structural I sheathing. ' 1. Span Ratting. Not less than 32/16. 2. Thickness: Not less than 112 inch(13 mm). . tB. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1,Structural I sheathing. • 1. Span Rating. Not less than 32/16. ' 2. Thickness: Not less than 112 inch(13 mm). ' ROUGH CARPENTRY 06I00-3 1 2.7 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT ' A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1,Exposure 1, Struchnal I single-floor panels. • 1 1. Span Rating. Not less than 24 oc. 2. Thiclmess: Not less than 2332 inch(15.3 mm). ' 3. Edge Detail: Tongue.and groove. B. Oriented-Stand Board,Combination Subfloor-Underlaymeft xxposure 1 single-loor panels. 1. Span Rating. Not less than 24 oc. 2. Thidmess: Not less than 2352 inch(18.3 mm. 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. ' 2.8 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Baddng Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire- retardant treated,in thicloaess indicated or,if not indicated,not less than 1/2 inch(12.7 mm)thick 2.9 FASTENERS ' A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicted that comply with requirements specified in this ' Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative ' humidity,provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 1531 • B. Nails,Brads,and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. ' D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. t E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing. ASTM C 954,except with wafer heads and reamer wings,length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. (ASME B 18.2.3.8M). ' G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568NL Property Class 4.6); with ' ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563W hex nuts and,where indicated,flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry ' assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. L Material: Carbon-steel components,zinc piked to comply with ASTM B 633,Class FelZn 5. ' 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ' ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 ' 1 ' A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer, l- inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from manufacturer's ' standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated B. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-0 I that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel mamrfactumrs. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL ' A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb,true to line, cut and fitted Fit rough carpentry to other construction,scribe and cope as needed for acmirate fit Locate furring,milers, blodang,grounds,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction_ ' B. Do not.use materials with.defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.. ' C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumb°:r and plywood. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying ' with the following: 1. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule,"in the BOCA National Building Code. ' E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or.will receive finish materials. .Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood;predrill as required. tF. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact,or in area of high relative humidity. ' G. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 1L No grade stamps or mill marks shall be exposed to view on exposed work. 3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER,BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION ' A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work Form to shapes indicated and cat as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible,secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement ' C. Provide t uads of dressed Live-Treated.k beveled lumber not less than I- permanent gro pressure-preserve ey- 1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish tmaterial. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. • 3.3 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION,GENERAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-5 1 A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise ' indicated. B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with ' mamd'acturcr's written instructions. C. Do not splice structural members between supports. , D. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal- (38-mm act ial-) dimension lumber on edge are required,fasten together with 2 rows of 20d(100-mm)nails spaced not less than 32 inches(812 mm)o.c. ' Locate one row near top edge and other near bottom edge. 1. For continuous members, stagger end joints at quarter points between supports locate end joints over supports. ' 3.4 WALL AND PARTPI'ION FRAMING INSTALLATION ' A. General: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is paralleL Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal(38- mm actual)thicdmess whose widths equal that of studs,except single top plate may be used for non-load- , bearing partitions. Anchor or nail plates to supporting construction,unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls,provide 2-by-4-inch nominal-(38-by-89-mm actual-)size wood studs spaced ' 16 inches(406 mm)o.c_,unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior partitions and walls,provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-nun actual-) size wood studs spaced 16 inches(406 mm)o.c.,unless otherwise indicated B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,fixtures,specialty items,and trim. 1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheigbt of partitions more than 96 inches (24 38 mm) ' high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and of same width as wall or. partitions. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thidmess equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs with headers not less.than 6-inch ' nominal (140-mm actual) depth for openings Less than 48 inches (1200 mm) in width, 8-inch nominal(184-mm actual)depth for openings 48 to 72 inches(1200 to 1800 mm)in width,and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000 , mm)in width.. 2. For loadbearing walls,provide double jamb studs for openings 72 inches (1800 mm)and less in width,and triple jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated. D. Provide bracing in exterior walls,at both walls of each external corner,full-story height,unless otherwise indicated. Provide one of the following: E. Provide bracing in walls,at locations indicated,full-story heigbt.unless otherwise indicated. Provide one t of the following: 1. Plywood panels not less than 48 by 96 inches(1219 by 2438 mm)applied vertically. ' 2. Oriented-strand-board panels not less than 48 by 96 inches(1219 by 2438 mm)applied vertically. ' 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-6 , • 3.5 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION ' A Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. 1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters,provide additional short joists parallel to rafters from wall plate to first joist;nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal-(19-by-184-mm actual-)size or 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-) size stringers spaced 48 inches (1200 nun)o.c. ' crosswise over main ceiling joists. B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use metal flaming anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge bangers. ' 1. At valleys,provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or,if not indicated,of same thiclmess as regular rafters and 2 inches (50 mm) deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing agaamst valley rafters. 2. At hips,provide hip rafter of size indicated or,if not indicated,of same thickness as regular rafts and 2 inches(50 mm)deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafter. . C. Provide collar beams(ties)as indicated or,if not indicated,provide 1-by-6-mch nominal-(19-by-1 40-mm actual-) size boards between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. Locate below ridge member,at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof slope and nail to rafters. D. Provide special flaming as indite for eaves,overhangs,dormers,and similar conditions,if any. 3.6 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION ' A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No.E30K "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential .& Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with"Code Plus"provisions in above-referenced guide. ' B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: 1, a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch(3 mm)apart at edges and ends. ' 2. Sheathing: a. Nail to wood fuming. b. Screw to cold formed metal framing. C. Space panels 118 inch(3 mm)apart at edges and ends. 3. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports. 1 • END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-7 1: 1 ' • SECON 06200-FINIS H CARPENTRY ' PART 1-GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUME NTS ' K Drawings and.geneml provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUNRAARY A- This Section includes the following: ' L . Interior standing and running trim. B. Related Sections include the following: ' 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for furring,blocking,and other carpentry work not a dosed to view and for structural wood decking and fiaming exposed to view. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Inspection agencies.and the abbreviations used to reference theme include the following. ' • 1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manrzfactuu ers Association. 2. NHLA-National Hardwood Lumber Association. ' 3. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. RIS-Redwood Inspection Service. 5. SCMA-Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association. 6. SPIB-Southern Pine won Bureau. 7. WCLIB-west Coast Lumber Inspection Bw=n 8. WWPA-Western wood Products Association. ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Samples for Verification- 1. 18" long x full board for each type of interior and exterior standing and rumirriug trim showing details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, ' textures,etc. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING ' A_ Prot=materials against weather and c6Wact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber; plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. ' B. Deliver interior finish carperay only when mmironmmi ai conditions meet requirsm>errts specified for • installation areas. If.finish carpe»try must be stored in other than installation areas, store only R�r= ' environmental conditions meet requirements specHied for me alladon areas. ' FINISH CARPENTRY 06200- 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL • A- Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified.by the AmM= Lumber Standards'Committee Board of Review. 2.2 N7ERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM I A. Softwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish(Stain or Clear Finish): Kiln-dried finished lumber(S4S) I of the following species and grade: I. Grade Prime Finish(clear)eastern white pine;NELMA or Idaho white, lodge pole, pond°ros. or sugar pine;WWPA. B. Moldings: Made to patterns inchnded in VVMMPA WM 7. Wood moldings made from kiln-dried start; ' and graded under WMIvIPA WM 4. 1. Moldings for Transparent Fmish (Stain or Clear Finish): N-grade eastern whiff, Idaho whir;., lodgepole,ponderosa,or sugar pine. a. Provide material selected for compatible grain and color. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A_ Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry Provide nails or screws of the following materials, in suffiaent • ' length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into substrate,unless otherwise recomm.°nd:f- by manufacturer: 1. Hot-dip galvanized steel. B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails,screws,and other anchoring devices of type.size.mammal. and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment concealed where possible. ' 1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with AS IM A 1531A 153K 2.4 FABRICATION A Wood Moisture Content Comply with requumments of specified inspection agencies and with ' nianmfacuu&s written recommendations for moisture coment of finish carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and m man areas. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thiclmess to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius and ' edges of lumber I inch(25 mm)or more in nominal thicimess to 1/8-inch(3-mm)radius. PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXANffNATION ' • FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-2 ' A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with.mstallation only after umsatis6actory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ' •A Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. ' B. Before installing finish carpentry,condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a n iairmun d 24 hours,unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. ' 3.3 INSTALLATION;GENERAL A Do not use materials that are unsound,warped,.improperly treated or finished,madequately seasoner or ' too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements• 1. Do not use mamffactured units with defective surfaces,sizes,or patterns. ' B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials Use concealed minus where necessary for alignment. ' I. Scnbe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cans as recommended Dy mann6act u+er. 2. counlasi.nk fasteners,fiIl surface flush,and sand where face fiiaemmg is unavoidable. 3. InstaIl to tolerance of 1/8 inch in % inches (3 nrm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. install • adjoining finish carpentry with 1132 inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch(1.5-mm)maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it Provide cutouts for- mechanical and.electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry. C. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final of finish carpentry. fimshmg . 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION ' A Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches(6 10 mm)long,except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at comers to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint Use scarf joints for endued ' joins. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thicimess across joints,where necessary for alignment . 1. Match color and grain-pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are comiplete& 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on agxmd carpentry work and fill holes. . 4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply fiat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. 3.5 .ADJUSTING ' A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be • repaired or refimshed if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing ' Adjust joinery for uniform ice. ' FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-3 3.6 CLEANING , A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and_.semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finish to • restore damaged or soiled areas. ' END OF SECTION 06200 ' • 1 I 1 • FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-4 ' ' DIVISION 7—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ' SECTION 07900—JOINT SEALERS 1 GENERAL 2 ' 3 Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and 4 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. S 6 Summary:This section includes sealant at base of benches. 7 8 Submittals: In addition to product data submit the following: 9 10 Samples of each type and color of joint sealer required. 11 ' 12 Certified test reports for joint sealers evidencing compliance with requirements 13 14 15 PRODUCTS 16 17 Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible 18 with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions. Coio 19 Provide color of exposed joint sealers indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by ' 20 Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 21 22 Exterior Sealant in vertical ioints: 23 24 Tremco`Dymeric°,Vulkem 116 or approved equal. 25 26 Primer. ' 27 • 28 Non-staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer,to suit application. 29 ' 30 Joint Cleaner. - 31 ro 32 Non corsive and non staining; recommended by sealant manufacturer, compatible with joint 33 forming materials. 34 35 36 Sealant Backing§, General: Non-staining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and 37 other joint fillers;.approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field 38 experience and laboratory testing. 39 40 Plastic Foam Joint-Fillers: Not Permitted. 41 42 43 EXECUTION 44 ' 45 General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to 46 products and applications indicated. 47 ' 48 Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard:Comply with ASTM C 962. 49 50 51 END OF SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS 07900-1 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ' PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel doors and frames. ' B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements th at relate to this Section: I. Section 08211-"Flush Wood Doors" 2. Section 08710-"Door Hardware 3. Section 09900-"Painting" ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions,hardware preparation,core,label compliance,sound ratings,profiles,and finishes. B. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type,elevations ofdoor design types,conditions at openings,details of construction,location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements,and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for factory-finished doors and frames. D. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required,prepared on Samples not less than 3 by 5 inches(75 by 125 mm)and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations,.include Sample sets showing the full range of variations ' expected. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' . A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI 100"Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames"and as specified. ' 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished ' items match new work and are acceptable to Architect;otherwise,remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch-(100-mm-)high wood ' blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If • cardboard wrappers on doors become wet,removecartons immediately.Provide minimum 1/4-inch(6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 1 PART2-PRODUCTS , 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: • 1. Exterior Steel Doors and Frames: , a. Amweld Building Products,Inc. b. Ceco Door Products. C. Curries Co. d. Fenestra Corp. e. Kewanee Corp. I f. Mesker Door,Inc. g- Republic Builders Products. h. Steelcraft. 2.. Prefinished Interior Steel Frames: a. Timely Industries. ' 2.2 MATERUILS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial-quality carbon steel,pickled and oiled,complying with ' ASTM A.569(ASTM A 569M). B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon.steel complying with ASTM A 366(ASTM A 366M). C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality complying with , ASTM.A 526(ASTM A 526M),with ASTM A 525,G60 zinc coating,mill phosphatized. • D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 18-gage thick galvanized sheet steel. E. Inserts,Bolts,and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, ' hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153,Class C or D as applicable. F. Glazing:Provide manufacturer's standard materials for indicated application. See door schedule. ' 2.3 DOORS ' A. Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inch-(44-mm-)thick doors ofmateriais and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and models specified below,or as indicated on Drawings or schedules. 1. Exterior Door:Fabricate with 0.0478-inch-l.2-mm-thick(18 gage),zinc-coated(galvanized)steel , face sheets;of styles indicated_ a. Core: Polyurethane foam with U-value rating of at least 0.07 Btu/sq.ft-x h x deg F,0.40 ' W/sq.m x K. 2. Interior Doors- Fabricate with 0.0359-inch-0.9-mm- thick (20 gage), steel face sheets; of styles `l indicated. a. Core(Door Separating the Offiice/Restroom from the Garage Area): Polystyrene foam with U-value rating of at least 0.16 Btu/sq.&x h x deg F,0.91 W/sq.m x K. • STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 09110-2 i 1 2.4 FRAMES ' A. Provide metal frames for doors,and other openings,according to ANSI/SDI 100,and of types and styles as shown on Drawings. Fabricate frames of cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel sheet(at fabricator's option). 1. Fabricate frames with mitered.or coped corners, continuously welded construction for exterior ' applications and knocked down for field assembly at interior applications. 2. Provide kerft frames to receive manufactures standard weather stripping for exterior doors as shown on drawings and schedule. .3. Form hollow metal frames from 16-gauge thick galvanized steel sheet. 1 4. Form prefinished metal frames from 20 gauge steel sheet. B. Weather Stripping:Provide manufacturers standard continuous weather stripping for kerft frames in jambs ' and head. C. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of '. single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid,neat in appearance,and free from defects,warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment,to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply '. with ANSUSDI 100 requirements. B. Clearances: Not more than 118 inch (3.2 mm)at jambs and heads. Not more than 314 inch(19 mm)at ' bottom or where doors have thresholds,as per threshold manufacturers recommendations. C. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels from only cold-rolled steel sheet. D. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated,fabricate doors,panels.and • frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDI 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part ofdoor construction or by addition of minimum 0.0635-inch-(1.6-mm-)thick galvanized steel ' channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. ' E. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels from the following material: 1. Cold-rolled steel sheet 2. Metallic-coated steel sheet where indicated. F. Core Construction:Fabricate using the following manufacturer's standard core materials that produce a door complying with SDI standards: ' 1. Polyurethane. 2. Polystyrene ' G. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel.Doors and Frames." H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners,reinforcement,edge channels,louvers,and moldings from either cold-or hot- rolled steel sheet- 1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated,provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws ' and bolts. • J. Thermal-Rated(Insulating)Assemblies: At exterior and interior cold wall locations and elsewhere as shown ' or scheduled,provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. ' STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 09110-3 L For exterior door and door separating the heated bay from the unheated bay provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value rating of at least 0.07 Btu/sq.R x h x.deg F,0.40 W/sq.m x K. ' 2. For interior door separating the office from the maintenance bay,provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value rating of at least 0.16 Btu/sq. ft.x h x deg F, 0.91 W/sq. m x K. K. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according ' to Section 08710-"Door Hardware"and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A 115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. L. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied ' hardware may be done at Project site. M. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or,if not indicated,according to the Door and Hardware , Institute's (DHI) "Recommended.Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." N. Casing retainer clips:Pre-finished metal frames for interior are to be f irnisbed with mechanically fastened casing retainer clips. Field install casing retainer clips on interior face of hollow metal frames per manufacturers recommendations. ' 2.6 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's 'Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and ' designating finishes. B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1,'Paint Application.Specification No. 1,"for steel sheet finishes. ' C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication. 2.7 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES ' • A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nocipetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other contaminants. After cleaning,apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating applied ' over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780. 1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, ' with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight,and complying with DOD-P- 21035 or SSPC-Paint 20. ' B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish.Apply air-dried primer specified below immediatelyafter cleaning and pretreatment. 1. Shop Primer: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer paint complying with performance requirements of ' FS TT-P-641,Type IL 2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria,is compatible with finish paint systems indicated,and has capability to provide a sound foundation ' for field-applied topcoats. Apply pier immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Where indicated provide for interior pre-finished metal frames, manufacturer's ' standard 2-coat,baked-enamel finish consisting ofprime coat and thermosetting topcoat that complies with ANSI A250.3. Comply with paint manufacturer's instructions for applying and baking to achieve a • minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils(0.0508 mm). ' STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4 1. Color and Gloss. As selected by Project Engineer from manufacturers full range of choices for color and gloss. 1 • PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors,frames,and accessories according to Shop Drawings,manufacturer's data,and .'. as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SD1 105,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed,remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. ' 2. At gypsum board partitions,install knock-down,slip-on,drywall frames. 3. Install casing on all interior frames and interior face of exterior hollow metal frames. ' 3.2 DOOR SCHEDULE A. See Drawings 1' 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ' A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection,sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. ' B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection,remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08110 1 1 ' STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-5 1 SECTION 08710-DOOR HARDWARE 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1' A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, 1 sliding,folding and sectional overhead doors,except special types ofunique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. B. This Section includes the following: 1. Hinges and Closers. 2. Lock/Latch sets,dead bolts and keys. 3. Miscellaneous door control devices. 4. Weatherstripping for exterior doors. . 5. Thresholds. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: ' 1. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" 2. Division 8 Section"Flush Wood Doors" 3. Division 8 Section"Sectional overhead Doors" 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data including manufacturers'technical product data for each item of door hardware,installation instructions,maintenance ofoperating parts and finish,and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. B. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors,frames,and related work to ensure proper size,thickness, hand,function,and finish of door hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated,organize schedule into"hardware sets"indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type,style,function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item.. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location ofeach hardware setcross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations,symbols,and codes contained in schedule. ' f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 2- Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final 1 instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. • C. Furnish templates to each fabricator of doors and frames,as required for preparation to receive hardware. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' DOORHARDWARE 08710- 1 A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware(latch and lock sets,hinges,closers,etc.)from ' a single manufacturer,unless specified otherwise. B. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard ' No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are • listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on.types and sizes of doors indicated in ' compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. 1.5 MAINTENANCE ' A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment,maintenance,and removal and replacement of t door hardware. PART 2-PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering ' products that may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the followiW 1. Hinges: Hager or equal ' a. Type:Provide full mortise template-produced units. 1) Swaged , 2) Rounded corners 3) Plain bearing except provide ball-bearing for doors with closers. b. Hinge Pins:Except as otherwise indicated,provide hinge pins as follows: t 1) Out-Swing Exterior Doors:Nonre movable pins • 2) Interior Doors:Nonrising pins 3) Tips:Flat button and matching plug,finished to match leaves ' C. Screws: Provide Phillips fiat-head screws complying with the foilowing requirements: 1) For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. ' 2) For wood doors and frames install wood screws. 3) Finish of screw heads to match surface of hinges. d. Size:4 '/z"X 4 %s" ' e. Finish: 26D-Satin Chrome Plated,exceptaluminum entrance doors finish to match frame. 2. Lock/Latch Sets,Including Cylinders: Schlage or equal: ' a. Lock/Latch Sets:AL Series,"Saturn". b. Deadbolt Locks:B Series,single cylinder ' C. Cylinders: , 1) 6-pin tumbler cylinders. 2) Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze,stainless steel,or nickel silver. d. Keying: t 1) Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required(master, • grandmaster or great-grandmaster). ' DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2 I2) Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. ' 3) Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder • manufacturer's key symbol,and notation,"DO NOT DUPLICATE." 4) Key Material:Provide keys of nickel silver only. ' 5) Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system,and 5 grandmaster keys for grandmaster system. 6) Deliver keys to Owner. ' e. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt,with curved lip extended to protect frame,except open strike plates may be used in wood frames. Finish to match hardware set,unless otherwise indicated. f. Finish: 626-Satin Chromium Plated except aluminum entrance doors finish to match frame. ' 3. Flush.Bolts:Glynn-Johnson or equal a. Manual flush bolt, forged brass construction, %"flattened bolt tip and standard 12"rod. b. Provide dust proof strike for bottom bolt,finish to match bolt. C. Finish,26D 4. Closers:LCN or equal a: Type: Overhead b. Size of Units: Except.as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control .unit depending on size of door, exposure to ', • weather,and anticipated frequency of use. 1) Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers,except as otherwise indicated. C. Access-Free Manual.Closers: Provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. ' d. Finish: Brushed Chrome except aluminum entrance doors finish to match flame. 5. Stops:Hager or equal ' a. Dome stop 1) Provide dome stop riser if required at thresholds,etc. ' b. Provide black resilient parts for exposed bumpers. C. Finish:to thatch other hardware. ' 6. Kick,Mop,and Armor Plates:Hager or equal a. .050"thick brass;beveled 1 b. Size: 8"z 2"smaller than actual door width dimension ' C. Finish: 26D Dull Chrome Plate • 7. Weather Stripping:Pemko Manufacturing Co.,Inc.or equal ' DOOR HARDWARE 08710-3 a. Head and Jambs:Per hollow door frame manufacturer ' b. Door Bottom: ' 1) Type: Threshold stop strip with seal 2) Material:Aluminum • 3) Mill finished aluminum 4) Silicone seal ' 8. Thresholds:Pemko Manufacturing Co.,Inc.or equal a. Type: Saddle Threshold 1 b. Material:Aluminum ' c. Mill finished aluminum 9. Silencer:Hager or equal ' a. Type:307D 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION ' A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using manufacturer's ' standard metal alloy,composition,temper,and hardness,but in no case of lesser(commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated. B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for ' machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws,except as specifically indicated. C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as ' otherwise indicated. Finish exposed(exposed under any condition)screws to match hardware finish or,if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including ' "prepared for paint"surfaces to receive painted finish. D. Provide concealed fasteners(unless specified otherwise)for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do ' not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru- bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw ' fasteners. PART 3 -EXECUTION , 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically ' indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect 1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames"by the Door , and Hardware Institute. 2. NWWDA industry Standard LS.1.7,"Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. r Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to he painted or ' DOOR HARDWARE 08710-4 ' '! finished in another way,coordinate removal,storage,and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not facto prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and rY P eP � P anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. I' F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. 3.2 ADJUSTING,CLEANING,AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area,return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware group numbers indicated in door schedule,and in the following schedule of hardware groups. B. Requirements for design,grade,function,quantity,item,manufacturer and/or productdesignation,size.and finish or color,are indicated in the Hardware Groups for establishing minimum requirements. C. Hardware Group No.1: Sectional Overhead Doors(2,3,4, 5). 1. Keyed cylinder locks. D. Hardware Group No. 2: Interior doors 1. 1 '/a Pair Hinges-No.BB1279 2. 1 Closer- Super Stock, 1461H Series 3. 3 Silencers-307D 4. 1 Threshold-No.272A 1 5. E. Hardware Group No. 3:Exterior doors.(Same as Group No. 2,except add the following.) ' 1. 1 Dead Bolt-B661P 2. Weatherstripping- -Head and Jamb: included in door frame 1-Door Bottom:stop strip 290ASSTOP • F. Hardware Group No.5:Restroom doors. 1. 1 '/z Pair Hinges-No. 1279 2. 1 Latchset-AL40s 3.. 1 Stop-240F DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 5 END OF SECTION 08710 ' 1 1 1 t • DOOR HARDWARE 08710-6 SECTION 09255 -GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL i • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.� A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY j A. This Section includes the following: Li 1. Gypsum board assemblies attached to wood framing: 1., B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for wood framing and furring,and gypsum sheathing applied over wood framing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1 A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology. Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms for gypsum.board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type of product specified. • 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings:Where indicated,provide materials and construction which are identical to those 'j of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire-resistance-rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference.to GA File No's in BA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual' or to design designations in U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory"or in listing of other testing agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 'i B. Single Source Responsibility:Obtaining each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,direct ' sunlight,surface contamination,corrosion,construction traffic,and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. • GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255- 1 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions,General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and ' finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations,whichever are more stringent. • B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing,maintain not less than 40 ' deg F(4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board,maintain.not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C)for 48 hours before application and continuously a leer until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F(35 deg C)when using temporary heat sources. , C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Available Manufiicturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that , may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following. 1. Gypsum Board and Related Products. a. Georgia-Pacific Corp. ' b. Louisiana-Pacific C, National Gypsum Co.;Gold Bond Building Products Division. ' d. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS ' A. General: Provide gypsum board oftypes indicated in maximum lengths availablethat will minimize end-to- • end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. 1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches(1219 mm). , B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: ' 1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Edges: Tapered. ' 3. Thickness: a. Walls: % inch(12.7 mm). b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). , C. Glass-Mat,Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1178 and as follows: 1. Type:Regular for vertical surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: a. Walls: '/: inch(12.7 mm). ' b. Ceilings:518 inch(15.9 mm). 4. Location:Restroom area. ' 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES • A. Provide manufacturer's standard trim accessories of types indicated for.drywall work,formed of galvanized , GYPSUM.BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-2 1 steel with either knurled and perforated or expanded g or stapling,flanges for nailing lin , and beaded for g g concealment of flanges in joint compound. Provide cornerbeads and J-type trim casing. ' 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS • A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both ' the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape. ' C. Setting-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-packaged,job-mixed, chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. ' 1 1. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for taping and filling only,use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. 2. For prefiiling gypsum board joints,use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. ' D. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready-Mixed.Formulation: Factory-mixed product a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories. b. Topping compound formulated for fill(second)and finish.(third)coats. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. • B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum panels. C. Steel drill screws complying with AST1vI C 1002, corrosion resistant for exterior work. 1 D. Primer.Sheetrock "First Coat"or equal. 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut,installed hollow metal frames,cast-in- ' anchors,and structural framing,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD,GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ' ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid ' abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints ofadjacent panels not less than one framing member. ' • C. Install gypsum panels with face side out Do not install imperfect,damaged,or damp panels. Butt panels together for alight contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch(1.5 mm)ofopen space between GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 3 panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate both edge or end joints over supports,except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or ' gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings where possible. ' E. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. F. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber,including floor joists and ' headers. Instead,float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. G. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid-core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32 , inches(8 13 mm)wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames. ' H. Isolate perimeter of nonioad-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide h-inch-(12.7-mm-)wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with J edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. ' I_ Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing,with floating internal corner construction. ' J. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. ' 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches(305 mm)o.c.for ceiling applications,and 16 inches(406 mm)o.c.for wall applications. 3.3 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS , • A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: ' 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing,unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls,apply gypsum panels horizontally(perpendicular to framing), unless parallel. ' application is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.Use maximum-length panels to minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. ' B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: I. Fasten with screws. , 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES , A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges,fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise,fasten trim accessories according to accessorymanufacturees directions for type, length,and spacing of fasteners. B. Install comerbead at external corners. , C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with • face flange formed to receive joint compound,except where other types are indicated. ' GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-4 ' ' indicated. 1. Install J-Trim,where c 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1 • A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of cornerbead, edge trim, control joints, ' penetrations,fastener heads,surface defects,and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. B. Prefill open joints,rounded or beveled edges,and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints,except those with trim accessories having flanges not requiring tape. ' D. Finish interiorgypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats(not including prefill of openings in base),and lightly sand or scrape Imperfections from the joints between coats and sand after last c 1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping compound. Fill (Second)Coat: Ready-mixed,drying-type,all-purpose or topping compound. Finish(Third)Coat: ' Ready-mixed,drying-type,all-purpose or topping compound. E. Prepare gypsum wallboard for painting with primer after all taping,joints compound and sanding has been completed. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ' A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. . B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions,in a manner acceptable to installer,that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Final Acceptance. ' END OF SECTION 09255 1 1, ' GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-5 SECTION 09678-RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS IA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. I1.2 . SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: ' 1. Resilient wall base and accessories. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: L Division 9 Section"Resilient Tile Flooring." ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of product specified. ' B. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard sizes,but not less than 12 inches(300 rnr..) long,of color and pattern of product specified. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Products: Obtain each type and color of product specified from z singts ' source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers,each ^ems n:�- names of product and manufacturer,Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. 1 B. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of instaliation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F(21 deg C) in spaces to receive products specified in this ' Section for at least 48 hours prior to installation,during installation,and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period,maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C). 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installing products specified in this Section with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. ' 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, ' packaged with protective covering for storage,and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet(3 linear meters)for each 500 linear feet(150 linear m i.°:;)or ' fraction thereof of resilient wall base installed. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678- 1 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE ' A. Type:Vinyl cove base complying with ASTM F-1861-98,Type TV,Group 1 (solid)and FS SS-W-40a. • 1. Size:4" height x 1/8"thickness. 2. Color:To be selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. ' B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers with products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to: 1. . Johnsonite. 2. Armstrong World Industries,Inc. 3. Azrock Floor Products Div.,Azrock Industries,Inc. 2.2 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES A. Resilient edge strips, 1/8"thick,homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition,tapered edge,color blaci:.not ' less than 1"wide. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES ' A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified,portland-cement-basedformuiation , provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient flooring product and , substrate conditions indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION , 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where.installation of products specified in this Section will occur,with Installer present;to , verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications for preparing substrates indicated to receive ' products indicated. B. Use trowelabie patching compounds per manufacturers directions to fill cracks,holes,and depressions in ' substrates. C. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing products specified in this ' Section. Following cleaning,examine substrates for moisture,alkaline salts,carbonation,or dust. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated according to manufacturer's ' installation directions. B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, casework,and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base ' RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678-2 ' is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece,with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 1. On concrete and masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates,fill voids along top edge of • resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 2. Form inside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where comer is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce snug fit to substrate. 3. Form outside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by shaving back of ' base at point where bending will occur. Remove a strip perpendicular to length of base and oniy ' deep enough to produce a snug fit without bends whitening or removal of more than half the thickness of wall base. ' C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of type indicated and bond to substrates with adhesive..Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be exposed. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Install resilient wall base in Lobby and Restrooms. ' 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ' A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by manuiarture^s of resilient product involved. ' 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect against mars,marks,indentations,and other damage from construction operations and piac.=snt ' of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indi:atsd or recommended by manufacturer of resilient product involved. ' C. Clean products specified in this Section not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Final Acceptance in each area of Project Clean products using metfio recommended by manurer. END OF SECTION 09678 i • RESMIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678-3 SECTION 09900-PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 -SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. This does not include exposed concrete or structural framing in garage area. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. 4. Exterior pavements. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surfiu—,paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish,the Project Engineer will select from standard colors ,i and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color 'j coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and • electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items,concealed surfaces,finished metal surfaces,operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include factory or installer finishing for such items as(but not limited to)metal toilet partitions,prefinished partition systems,acoustic materials,architectural woodwork,laboratory casework,elevator doors,frames and equipment,prefinished interior metal door frames,wood doors, exterior cladding ofwood windows,louvers,and mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures,switchgear and distribution cabinets. i i Concealed surfaces include wails or ceilings in concealed areas and generally in inaccessible areas, 'furred areas,utility tunnels,pipe spaces,duct shafts and elevator shafts. 1i _ 3. Finished metal surfaces inciudeanodized aluminum,stainless steel,chromium plate,copper,bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting. ' 4. Operating parts include mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages,sensing devices,motor and fan shafts. 5. Code-required labels include Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual,or any equipment t identification,performance rating,name or nomenclature plates. 'I D. Related Sections include the following: • 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. ' 2. Division 9 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies"for surface preparation for gypsum board and primer type and application. 3. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and 16, ' PAINTING 09900- 1 respectively. 1.3 DEFINITIONS , A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. • 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an$5-degree , meter. 2. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree ' meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Submit manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application ' instructions for each material proposed for use. B. Samples: Prior to beginning work, Project Engineer will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted. Submit samples for Project Engineer's review of color and texture only. Provide a listing of material and , application for each coat of each finish sample. 1. On 12"xI2"hardboard,provide two samples of each color and material, with texture to simulate ' actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by Project Engineer until acceptable sheen,color and texture is achieved. 2. On actual wood surfaces,provide two 4"xg"samples of natural and stained wood finish. Label and ' identify each as to location and application. 3. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job, 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers,primers,and undercoat materials for each coating system from • the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original,unopened packages and containers bearing ' manufacturer's name and label,and the following information: I. Product name or title of material. ' 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume,for pigment and vehicle constituents. ' 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient ' temperature of 45 deg F(7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue. ' L . Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling,mixing,and application. ' 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS i A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air ' PAINTING 09900-2 temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air ' de temperatures are between 45 and 95 and 35 • P g F(7.2 deg C .) C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog,or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at ' temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C)above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather ifsurf Ices and areas to be painted are enclosed and ' heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1; PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are refereed to in the paint schedules by use of ' shortened versions of their names,which are shown in parentheses: 1. Glidden Co.(The)(Glidden). 2. Benjamin Moore&Co.(Moore). 3. PPG Industries,Inc.(PPG). 4. Pratt&Lambert,Inc.(P&L). 5. Sherwin-Williams Co.(S-W). 6. Vanex,Inc.(Vanex) 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, rimers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are • P compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application,as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-duality paint material ofthe various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use ofmanufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the,exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. ' C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Project Engineer. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I ' A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be _. performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfacers and conditions within ' a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the ' PAINTING 09900-3 t various finish materials oral system for ar ous substrates. On request,furnish information on characteristics of is to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Project Engineer about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. • F.—REPARATION ' A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories,plates,machined surfaces, lighting fixtures,and , similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight ofthe item,provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area,reinstall items removed using workers ' skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments,clean the substrates of substances that could ' impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,newly painted surfaces. ' C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. ' 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt,oil,and other foreign substances with scrapers,mineral spirits,and ' sandpaper,as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust o$ a. Scrape and clean small,dry,seasoned knots,and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other ' recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming,fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime,stain,or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges,ends,faces, ' undersides,and backsides of wood, including cabinets,counters,cases,and paneling. 3. Ferrous Metals:Clean.ferrous metal surfaces,which are not galvanized or shop-coated,of oil,grease, dirt,loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical means. ' a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. , b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer,and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. , D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacun er`s written.instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition,free of foreign materials , and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. .If necessary, remove surface film and strain ' material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best • suited for substrate and type of material being applied. ' PAINTING 09900-4 , 1 1. Paint colors,surface treatments,and finishes are indicated in the schedules. ' 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The term "exposed surfaces"includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures are in place. • Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. ' 4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as sim ilar exposed surfaces.Before the final installation of equipment,paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 5. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 6. Finish exterior doors on tops,bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting. Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned,pretreated,or otherwise prepared ' for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the ' manufacturer. . D. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer,to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears,to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. E. Pigmented(Opaque)Finishes:.Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,opaque surface of uniform finish,color,appearance,and coverage. Cloudiness,spotting,holidays,laps,brush marks,runs, sags,ropiness,or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. ' • F. Transparent(Clear)Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness,color irregularity,brush marks,orange peel,nail holes,or ' other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. G. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color,texture,and coverage. Remove,refinish,or repaint work not complying with requirements. ' 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint ' materials from the site. 1_ After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by ' washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION 1 A. Protect work of other trades,whether being painted or not,against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning,repairing or replacing,and repainting,as approved by Project Engineer. ' B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. • 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch up and restore damaged or defaced ' painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA Pl. ' PAINTING 09900-5 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on , shop-primed items. 1. Satin,Acrylic-Latex Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. ' a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 13 mils(0.033 mm). b. First and Second Coats: Satin,exterior,acrylic-latex applied at spreading rate recommended -- by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils(0.066 mm). 1) PPG: Pitt-Tech One Pack High Performance Acrylic DTM Enamel,90-400 Series ' B. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal _ surfaces: , 1. Full-GIoss,Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the ' manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.031 mm). b. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils(0.066 mm). 1) PPG: 6-282 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Gloss-Oil Enamel. , C. Pavements: Provide the following finish systems for pavement markings: , 1. Paint for pavement marking as per MoDOT section 620 and shall be alkyd-resin type,ready-mixed, • complying with FS TT-P-115,Type 1,or AASHTO M-248,Type N. PAINTING 09900-6 , ' 2. Color: As indicated b the"Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices" and the following. Y g a. All markings for disabled parking spaces,symbols and access aisles shall be blue. 1 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE rA. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Semigloss/Satin,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. ' a. Primer: See Division 9 Section 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss/Satin,acrylic-latex,interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils(0.066 mm). 1) Vanex: Breakthrough Satin 2) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall&Trim Lo-Lustre Semi-Gloss Latex. B. Stained Woodwork: Provide the followin g stained finishes over.new,interior woodwork: 1. Polyurethane-Based,Satin-Finish: 2 finish coats of an Polyurethane-based,clear-polyurethane satin over a sealer coat and an alkyd-based,interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Paste-wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) PPG: None required. b. Stain Coat: Alkyd-based,interior wood stain applied at spreading rate recommended by the ' manufacturer. • 1) PPG: 77-302 Rez Interior Semi-Transparent Stain. ' C. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) PPG: 77-30 Rez Interior Quick-Drying Sealer and Finish. d. First and Second Finish Coats:Poiyurethane,applied at spreading rate recommended by the ' manufacturer. 1) PPG: 77-89 Rez Polyurethane,Satin Clear Interior. C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Satin,Acrylic-Latex Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. ' a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). b. First and Second Coats: Satin,exterior,acrylic-latex applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness ofnot less than 2.6 mils(0.066 mm). I) PPG: Pitt-Tech One Pack High Performance Acrylic DTM Enamel, 90-400 Series ® D. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated(galvanized)metal surfaces: 1 1. Full-Gloss,Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. ' PAINTING 09900-7 a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.031 mm). b. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils(0.066_mm). 1) PPG: 6-282 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Gloss-Oil Enamel. ---.---.END OF SECTION-09900.- -- - -- --. _..------- 1 1 • PAINTING 09900 -8 , SECTION 10800-TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL IV 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items as scheduled. 1� 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction details relative to materials, dimensions,gages,profiles,mounting method,specified options,and finishes. B. Samples of each toilet accessory item to verify design,operation,and finish requirements. Acceptable full- size samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. C. Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work,including templates,preparation instructions, ' and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage devices. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1� A. Single-Source Responsibility. Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit exposed to view in same areas,unless otherwise acceptable to Project Engineer. B. Products of other manufacturers Tested in Part 2 with equal characteristics, as judged solely by Project Engineer,may be provided. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation,operation, adjustment,cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering toilet accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide toilet accessories by one ofthe following: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment,Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. ' 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL y • A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304,with satin finish,0.034 inch(0.9 mm)minimum thickness. B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, ASTM B 19; rods, shapes, for i s, and flat products with TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10900- 1 finished edges,ASTM B 16(ASTM B 16M);Castings,ASTM B 30. a C. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal,ASTM B 456,Type SC 2. ' D. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153,hot-dip galvanized after.fabrication. E. Fasteners: Screws,bolts,and other devices of same material as accessory unit,or o€galvanized steel where ' concealed. F. Mirror Glass: ASITA C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, ' electroplated copper coating,and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M 2.3 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS ' A. Recessed Toilet Paper Holder. ' 1. ASI,Model 7402-S or approved equal. 2.4 FABRICATION ' A. General: Only a maximum 1-112 inch (38 mm) diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as , approved by Project Engineer, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or back surface,provide additional identification by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate,indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ' • A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers'instructions,using fasteners appropriate to substrate , as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level,firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed,tamper-resistant manner with special hangers,toggle bolts,or screws. ' Set units level,plumb,and square at locations indicated,according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf(1100 N),complying with ASTM F 446. , 3.2 SCHEDULE ' A. Provide toilet paper holders for each water closet. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND'CLEANING , A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. , B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. :1 END OF SECTION 10800 • ' 1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-2 :, SECTION 15000-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMEWS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division i Specification Sections,apply to this Section. . 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK ' A_ This work shall include all plant, labor, material, and equipment as required to furnish and install mechanical work as shown on the drawings and as hereinafter specified. All plant, labor, material and equipment not shown on the drawings and not specified but necessary and incidental to provide first class ' and complete installations of mechanical work shall be included in this contract. B. All licenses and permits required for the performance of this work shall be included in this contract All equipment under this division shall be installed under competent supervisory service furnished by the Contractor and where necessary shall include services of special erection and operating engineers. ' 1.3 MISCELLANEOUS CONDITIONS A. All installed materials and equipment shall be new and ofthe best quality and design,and shall be free from defects and imperfections. B. All work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements Article 5 of the General Conditions (Compliance with Laws,Regulations and Inspections),and as specified below. 1 • All.work shall be in accordance with all local codes and ordinances including the intest requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), the Building Official and Code Administrators International,Inc.(BOCA),the International Mechanical Code and the International Plumbing Code. Laws,codes and ordinances conflicting with specifications and drawings shall govern,unless exceeded by specifications and drawings in quality or quantity. ' C. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating this work with the work of other trades on the pro;-,°r t including responsibility for all material and equipment deliveries and installation in a manner so as to prevent delay in construction schedule. ' D. Acceptance of the work shall be subject to the condition that all systems, equipment, apparatus and appliances included in the work shall operate and perform as designed and selected.with respect to efficiency,capacity and quietness. Acceptance ofthe work shall further be subject to the conditions that any time within one year offinal approval date any defective part ofthe work resulting from faulty workmanship or material shall be immediately amended,repaired,or replaced without additional cost to the Owner. ' 1.4 INSPECTION OF AREA A. The Contractor shall be responsible for field inspection of the area before preparing his bid. 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000- 1 1.5 VARIATION FROM SPECIFICATIONS A. Variations from the specifications will be considered,provided attention is drawn to such variations and , details given for the variations. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all variations or to accept • the variation which it deems most suitable without recourse. 1.6 CLEANING UP , A. The Contractor shall remove from the Owner's property all temporary structures,rubbish and waste material resulting from the construction,and in general,leave the work area in clean and workmanlike condition. 1-7 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. See Article 2 of the General Conditions. ' B. Where specific details and dimensions are not shown on the drawings, the contractor shall take , measurements and make layouts as required for proper installation of mechanical work so that interference with all other work will be avoided. This includes roughing-in for fixtures and equipment as called for or inferred. 1.8 SUBMITTALS , A. Shop drawings and Samples shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Articles I&L- 19 of , the General Conditions and as follows: B. Submittals shall include but not be limited to the following: ' 1. Manufacturer's detail drawings of equipment and material. 2. Descriptive literature including catalog data covering design,size,performance and capacity of ' material and equipment- 3. Contractor's shop details for installation of material and equipment ' 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions shall be made in accordance with the Article 16 of the General Conditions and as follows:In , addition to the conditions of Article 16 the contractor shall make all required changes in the performance of any and all equipment affected by the change. 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor shall furnish all services as required for adequate verbal and written instructions to the , Owner's operating and maintenance personnel for operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems installed. B. Warranties and operating instructions shall be provided in accordance with Article 32 of the General , Conditions,and as follows: C. Materials shall be furnished in hard-back binders and shall include all manufacturer's printed instructions for equipment installation,operation and maintenance and all approved shop drawings. Hardback binders shall be similar to National Stiff Cover Ring.Binders with heavy duty Tufvin cover,metal hinge and label holder and rings with open,dose and lock booster. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000-2 1.11 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT rA. All required electrical equipment, such as motors, starters, relays and electric or electronic controls for equipment furnished shall be installed per specifications in Division XVI-Electrical Work. 1.12 ALIGNMENT OF DRIVERS,DRIVES AND DRIVEN EQUIPMENT A. Drivers (motors and/or engines)shall be set level and aligned with equipment being driven and shall be securely fastened in place. Drivers shall be rated for a minimum of 150•A of the driver horsepower and shall be provided with coupling or belt guards as required by OSHA and as directed by the engine=. All equipment requiring lubrication shall be kept in the best operating condition during performance of the ' work. . 1.13 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT A. All control devices,specialties,valves,junction boxes,pull boxes and removable panels on equipment shall be so located as to provide easy access for inspection and maintenance including removal of any interior components. Any material or equipment,such as piping,ducts,conduit,etc.,that is installed without due regard to the accessibility of equipment and devices shall be relocated,offset or rerouted without cozz.to the Owner. 1.14 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS A. General ' The contractor shall locate and provide all sleeves and openings required for the execution of the design as specified. Contractor shall locate sleeves and openings as shown on the structural drawings,if showe. ' No sleeves are permitted through concrete struchnai members unless indicated on the structural d-awings • or approved in writing by the Engineer. All sleeves shall be carefully and accurately set. Sleeves set in concrete construction shall be s=reiv ' anchored as required to prevent movement and maintain alignment,when concrete is poured. Sleeves shall be sealed to the surrounding suction using grout,piaster eta as approved by en=iner . ' Space between pipe and sleeve shall be sealed using approved sealants. Sealants shall be seie,^ted to maintain the fire rating of the partition. Sealant shall be finished flush with adjacent surfaces. Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the sealant materials for approval by engineer. B. Exterior Walls ' 1. Masonry or Concrete:All sleeves penetrating masonry or concrete walls shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe. Sleeves shall be cut flush with both sides of wail and all burrs or sharp edges filed smooth. ' 2. Wood Frame: Sleeves shall not be required where pipe lines penetrate exterior wood frame walls. The piping shall be anchored to prevent all motion at the penetration location and the penetrations ' shall be sealed air and water tight - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.SE00- 3 3. Duct Penetration(Masonry and Wood Frame): All ducts through exterior walls shall be reinforced on both sides of wall with angle iron or galvanized sheet steel frames. Contractor shall provide lintels as required and directed by the engineer for masonry penetrations. Opening between ductwork and wall opening shall be sealed using approved sealant. Sealant shall be selected to ' maintain the fire rating of the separation. Where fire walls are involved, fire dampers shall be installed in accordance with UL and NFPA.requirements. All steel shall be galvanized or painted. Equipment(fans,etc.)Penetrating walls shall be provided with lintels,fire dampers,etc.as specified for ducts above. , C. Interior Walls,Ceilings&Partitions 1. Masonry or Concrete:All sleeves penetrating masonry or concrete walls shall be Schedule 40 black , steel pipe. Sleeves shall be cut flush with bode sides of wall and all burrs or sharp edges flied smooth. , 2. Drywall:All piping passing through new or existing dry way partitions or ceilings shall be sealed to the drywall and where exposed,shall be provided with chrome plated escutcheons. Piping shall be supported such that motion of piping at the point of wall penetrations is eliminated. 3. Duct Penetration(Masonry and Drywall): All ducts through interior walls,ceilings and partitions shall be reinfiorced on both sides ofwall with angle iron or galvanized sheet steel frames. Contractor ' shall provide lintels as required and directed by the engineer for masonry penetrations. Opening between ductwork and wall opening shall be sealed using approved sealant. Sealant shall ' be selected to maintain the fire rating of the separation. Where fire walls are involved,fire dampers shall be installed in accordance with UL and NFPA requirements. All steel shall be galvanh=d or painted. Equipment(fans,etc.)penetrating walls shall be provided with lintels,fire dampw s,etc. as specified for duds above. , D. Floors I. Floor Sleeves: ' a. All piping through floors shall be installed in sleeves. b. Unless other wise indicated on the structural drawings, floor sie ei=shalt be as follows. , Sleeves in floors shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves extending 1" above floor to serve as a water stop. Sleeves shall be sealed so as to be watertight and maintain fire rating ' of floor. END OF SECTION 15000 • 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000-4 , SECTION 15410-PLUMBING PIPING • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Div:sian 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY I A. This Section includes plumbing piping systems to a point 60 inches (1500 mm) outside the building*. Systems include the following: 1 1. Potable water distribution,including cold-and hot-water supply. ` 2. Drainage and vent systems, including sanitary. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"for piping joining materials; ioint construction,and installation requirements not specified in this Section. I2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties"for plumbing system components. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working pressure ratings,except where indicated otherwise: t1. Water Distribution Systems,Below Ground: 150 psig(1035 kPa). • 2. Water Distribution Systems,Above Ground: 125 psig(860 kPa). 3. Soil,Waste,and Vent Symms: 10-foot head of water(30 kPa). ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division l Sections. B. Product data for the following plumbing piping products: 1. Couplings and fittings for grooved-end copper tube and grooved-end copper fittings. C. Water samples,test results,and reports specified in "Field Quality Control"and"Cleaning"Articles. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Comply with the provisions of ASME B31.4 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS ' 2_I MANUFACTURERS • A. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products&.at- inay be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: ' PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 1 i i 1. Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tube and Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ' a. Victauiic Co.of America. • 2.. Mechanically Formed Outlet Procedure: i a. T-Drill Industries,Inc. 2.2 PIPES AND TUBES ' A. General: The application of the following pipe,tube,and fitting materials and joining methods required , for plumbing piping systems are indicated in Part 3 Article"Pipe and Fittings Applications." B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Types K,L, and M,(ASTM B 88M,Types A,B,and C,) water tube, drawn temper. C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Types K and L,(ASTM B 88M,Types A and B)water tube,annealed temper. D. Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic,DWV Pipe: ASTM D 2665,Schedule 40,plain ends. 2.3 PIPE FITTINGS AND TUBE FITTINGS A. Wrought-Copper,Solder-3oint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.22. , B. Wrought-Copper and Bronze,Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75(ASTM B 75M)Tube and ASTM B 5&4 Bronze Castings. C. Copper Tube, Grooved-End Mechanical Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M), copper albs and ' ASTM B 584 bronze castings. • D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24,Classes 150 and 300. ' E. Copper Unions: ASME BI 6.18,cast-copper-alloy body,hexagonal stock,with ball-and-socket joint metal- ' to-metal seating surfaces,and solder-joint,threaded,or solder joint and threaded ends. 1. Threaded Ends: Threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1. F. Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic,DWV Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2665,made to ASTM D 3311;socket- type:drain,waste,and vent pipe patterns. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS ' A. Solder,brazing,and welding filler metals are specified in Division 15 Section"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." , ✓ B. Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tube and Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM A 536 ductile-iron or ASTM A 47 malleable-iron housing having copper-colored enamel finish,with synthetic-rubber gasket , having central-cavity,pressure-responsive design and suitable for hot water,with ASTM A 183 carbon-steel bolts and nuts. 2.5 VALVES A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties"far special-duty valves. • PLUMBING PIPING 15410-2 PART 3 -EXECUTION I3.1 EXCAVATION • A. Excavation,trenching,and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." ' 3.2 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED PIPING IA. Grade trench bottom to provide smooth,firm,stable,and rock-free foundation throughout length of piping. B. Remove unstable,soil,and unsuitable materials at surface on which piping is to be laid and backffil with ' clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level. C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with tamped-sand backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve bells of loads and to ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on fi)undabon. ' 3.3 PIPE AND FTITINGS APPLICATIONS ' A. General: Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications. B. Water Distribution Piping Below Ground: Use the following: ' 1. 2 Inches(DN 50)and Smaller: Soft copper tube.Type K(Type A),east-copper-alloy soide:_join; pressure fittings,and soldered joints with Alloy Sn95 solder. 1 C. Water Distribution Piping Above Ground. Use the following- 1. 3-1/2 Inches(DN 90)and Smaller: Bard copper tube,Type L (Type B); flare pressure.fittings; • Mow ground water service shall be continuous without joints. tD. Soil,Waste,and Vent Piping Below Ground: Use the following: 1. 2 to 4 inches(DN 50 to DN 100): Poiy(vinyl chloride)(PVC)plastic DWV pipe;PVC see:-tt 1 drain,waste,and vent pipe pattern fittings;and solvent-cemented joints. 2. I-114 and 1-1/2 Inches(DN 32 and DN 40): Polyvinyl chloride)(PVC)plastic DWV pipe;PiIC socket-type drain,waste,and vent pipe pattern'fittings;and solvent-cemented joints. ' E. Soil,Waste,and Vent Piping Above Ground: Use the following: 1. 2 to 4 Inches(DN 50 to DN 100): Polyvinyl chloride)(PVC)plastic DWV pipe;PVC socket-type drain,waste,and vent pipe pattern fittings;and solvent-cemented joints. 2. 1-1/4 and 1-112 Inches(DN 32 and DN 40): Poiy(vinyl chloride)(PVC)plastic DWV pipe;PVC socket-type drain,waste,and vent pipe pattern fittings;and solvent-cemented joints. ' 3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used_ Where specific valve types are not indicated,the following ' requirements apply. 1. ShutoffDuty: Use gate,or ball valves. 2. Throttling Duty: Use globe,or ball valves. • 3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION,GENERAL I ' PLUMBING PIPING 15410-3 A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section"BasicMechanical Materials and ' Methods." B. Install water hammer arrestor in accordance with the latest version of the International Plumbing Code. • Water hammer arrestor shall be manufactured by Sioux Chief or similar and be sized in accordance with , manufacturers recommendations. C. Install thermal expansion control expansion tank on the hot water supply system in accordance with the ' latest version of the International Plumbing Code. Expansion tank shall be manufactured by A.mtral or similar and be sized in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.6 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING , A. Extend water distribution piping and connect to water service piping of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building. , B. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connectto sanitary sewer piping of size and in location indi=ed for service entrance to building. Install manhole or cleanout and extension to grade at connection of , building sanitary drain and building sanitary sewer_ C_ Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve sea] at service penetrations through foundation wall for wat-�-right installation. ' 3.7 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION A. install piping with 1132-inch-per-foot(1:400)(1/4 percent)slope downward toward drain. , 3.3 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION , A. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate Y branches,Y branches wits 1/S • bends,and long-sweep 1/4, 1/5,1/6,1/8,and 1/16 bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where change in direction of flow is from horizontal to veruzal. ' Use long-turn double-Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings where 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side and have a common drain. Straight tees,elbows,and crosses may be used on vent lines. Make no change in direction offlow greater than 90 degrees- Where drffereat sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are ' connected,use proper size standard increasers and reducers. Reduction ofthe sizeofdrainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited. B. Lay buried building drains beginning at low point of each system,true to grades and alignment indicated, ' with unbroken continuity of invert_ Place hub or bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as completed_ , C. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes,except where another slope is indicated: 1. Sanitary Building Drain: 1/4 inch per foot(1:50)(2 percent) for piping 3 inches (DN 80) and , smaller, 1/4 inch per foot(1:50)(2 percent)for piping 4 inches(DN 100)and larger. 2. . Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping. 114 inch per foot(1:50)(2 percent)_ 3. Vent Piping: 1/8 inch per foot(1:100)(1 percent). , 3.9 JOINT CONSTRUCTION. . A_ Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanicai Materials and , Methods." • B. Grooved Pipe and Grooved-Pipe Fitting Joints: Assemble joints with coupling,gasket,lubricant,and bolts , PLUMBING PIPING 15410-4 according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. tC. Grooved Copper Tube and Grooved-Tube Fitting Joints: Assemble joints with coupling,gasket,lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. D. Mechanically Formed Outlet Joints: Make joints according to forming equipment manufacturer's written instructions. Use tool designed for piping material being joined,drill pilot hole,and form collar for b:arch connection. 1. Copper Tube: Dimple tube to form seating stop and braze branch tube into formed collar outlet. ' E. PVC DWV Pipe: Join PVC drainage pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2665. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. Sectional Valves: install sectional valves close to main on each brand and riser serving 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for sectional valves 2 inches(DN 50)and smaller. Use gate or ball waives for sectional valves 2-1/2 inches(DN 63)and ' larger. . B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item,on each supply to each ' plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies,at all main-branch connections,at bottom of rites where they originate from a continuous main and rise to a floor or floors above and elsewhere as indicated. Fo- shutoff valves 2 inches(DN 50)and smaller,use gate or ball valves;for shutoff valves 2-1/2 Incites(DN 65) and larger,use gate or ball valves. . 7 ' C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" on earth plumbing equipment item iocated to drain equipment for service and repair. hlstall drain valve at base of ' each riser,at low points of horizontal Tans,and where required to drain water distribution piping system. 1_ install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains,risers,and branches. 2. install stop and waste drain valves where indices. ' 3.11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS INSTALLATION ' A. Banger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Conform to table below for maximum spacing of supports: ' Horizontal Vertical Pie Material In Feet In Feet ' Copper Tubing- 1-1/4 inches and Smaller 6 10 Copper Tubing- 1-1/2 Inches and Larger 10 16 PVC Plastic Pipe 4. 4 ' C. Pipe Attachments: Install the following: 1. Riser Clamps: MSS Type'8 or Type 42 for vertical runs. ' 2. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1 for individual straight horizontal runs 100 feet(30 m)and less. 3. Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43 for individual straight horizontal runs longer than 100 ' feet(30 m). • 4. Spring Cushion Rolls: MSS Type 49,where indicated,for individual straight horizontal runs ionge than 100 feet.(30 m). ' S. Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 44 for multiple straight horizontal runs 100 feet(30 m)or longer. Support PLUMBING PIPING 15410- 5 1 i r pipe rolls on trapeze. ' b. Spring Hangers: MSS'Type 52 for support of base of vertical runs. D. Support plastic pipe and tubing not included in table according to manufacturer's recommendations: 3.12 CONNECTIONS A. Supply Runouts to Fixtures: Install hot-and cold-water supply piping runouts of sizes indicated,but not ' smaller than required by plumbing code to fixtures. B. Drainage Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts,with approved trap, of si= ' indicated,but not smaller than required by plumbing code,to plumbing fixtures and drains. C. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. � ,D. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot-and cold-water supply piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated. Provide shutoffvalve and union for each connection;provide drain valve on drain connection. ' l 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. inspect water distribution piping as follows- 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has inn i inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. , 2. During progress of the installation,notify the plumbing officipl having jurisdiction at least 24 hours J prior to time inspection must be made. Perim tests specified below in presence of the plumbing official. a_ Roughing-In Inspection:Arrange for inspection of piping system before concealed or ciosec- in after system roughing-in and prior to settmg fixtures. ' b. Final inspection: Arrange for final'inspection by plumbing official to observe tests spw nad Jbelow and to ensure compliance with requirements of plumbing code. 3. Reinspections: When a plumbing official finds that piping system will not pass test or inspection, ' make required corrections and arrange for reinspection by the plumbing official. 4. Reports: Prepare inspec tioe reports signed by plumbing official. l B. Test water distribution piping as follows: ' I. Test far leaks and defects in new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that , have been altered,extended,or repaired. Iftesting is performed in segments,submit separate report for each test,complete with diagram of portion of system tested. 2. Leave uncovered and uncontested in nevi,altered,extended,or replaced water distribution piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has ' been tested and approved for testing. J 3. Cap and sabjeet the piping system to a static water pressure of30 psig(345 kPa)above the operating pressure without exceeding pressure mating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. ' 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfadory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. ' i J C. Inspect drainage piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has been ' PLUMBING PIPING 15410-6 1 inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. ' 2. During progress of installation,notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction at least 24 hours prior to time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of the plumbing official. a. Roughing-In inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system after system roughing in, before concealing,and prior to setting fixtures. ' b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by plumbing official to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements of plumbing code. 3. Reinspections: Make required corrections and arrange for reinspection by plumbing official when piping system fails to.pass test or inspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports signed by the plumbing official. ' D. Drainage and Vent Piping System Tests: Test drainage and vent systems aceording.to procedures of authority having jurisdiction or,in absence of published procedure,as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new drainage and vent piping systems and parts of existing systems that ' have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments,submit a separate report for each test,complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed in new,altered,extended,or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose for testing work that has been covered or conc=ed before it has been tested and approved. 3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed drain ' tile,test piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems on completion of roughing-in piping installation. Tightly close all openings in piping system and fill with water to paint of overflow,but not less than 10 feet head of water(30 kPa). Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Ind joints for leaks. ' 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After piumbing fixtures have been set and theirtraps fired uitb water,test connections and prove gastight and watertight. Plug stack openings on roof and buiiding drain where it leaves the building and introduce air into the system equal to pressure of I inch watr-. ' column(250 Pa). Use a U tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measu-e this pressure. Air pressure shall remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. ' 5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until sadsfi:.�-T results are obtained. 6- Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. ' 3.14 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect waxer distribution piping as follows: ' 1. . Purge new potable water distribution piping systems and parts of existing potable water systems that have been altered,extended,or repaired prior to use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction or,if a method ' is not prescribed by that authority,the procedure described in either AW W A C651 or AW W A C652 or as descn'bed below: a. Flush piping system with clean,potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Valves and faucets shall be opened several times during the disinfection 1 process. Isolate(valve oft)and allow to stand for 24 hours. C. The system may be flushed if residual chlorine is not less than 10 ppm. If the residual chlorine is less than IOppm,the disinfection procedure shall be repeated- ' d. After the sterilization process,the system shall be thoroughly flushed with clean water until the chlorine conterit is less than 0.1 ppm. PLUMBING PIPING 15410-7 1 C. Water samples shall be taken in bottles furnished by the Department ofNatural Resources- , Environmental Quality for a complete bacteriological analysis.. If water is not suitable for human consumption,the sterilization process shall be repeated until water is approved as • satisfactory for use. Sterilization process shall meet requirements of the Department of Natural Resources-Environmental Qualityand theContiwwr shall provide all materials and ' labor to perform the work. B. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities. ' C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.15 COMMISSIONING , A. Fill water systems. Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is completely full of water. , B. Before operating systems,perform these steps: 1. Close drain valves,hydrants,and hose bibbs. ' 2. Open shutoff valves to full open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping systems and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping ' during installation. C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings,adjustments,and operation. Do not operate water ' heaters before filling with water. D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings,adjustments,and operation. 3.16 PROTECTION , A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to present ' damage from traffic and construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or when work stops. ' C. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect piumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats ofa water-based latex paint END OF SECTION 15410 1 1 • FLUMBING PIPING 15410-8 SECTION 15440-PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 1 • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim,faucets,other fittings,and related components. B. This Section includes plumbing specialties for water distribution systems; soil,waste,and vent systems. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: a. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing between fixtures and walls,floors, and counters. ' b. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"for piping-joining materials,joint construction,basic installation requirements,and labeling and identifying requirements. C. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Piping"for piping and connections. 1, 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Accessible:Plumbing fixture,building,facility,or portion thereofthat can be approached,entered,and used by physically handicapped,disabled,and elderly people. ' B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section • include supplies and stops,faucets and spouts,shower heads and tub spouts,drains and tailpieces,traps and waste pipes. Pipe fittings,tube fittings,and genera!-duty valves are included where indicated. ' 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - A. Provide components and,installation capable ofproducing piping systeins with following minimum working pressure ratings,except where otherwise indicated: a. Water Distribution Systems,Below Ground: 150 psig(1035 kPa). b. Water Distribution Systems,Above Ground: 125 psig(860 kPa). C. Soil,Waste,and Vent Systems: 10 foot head of water-(30 kPa). d. Sanitary Sewage Systems:75 psig(520 kPa). ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 ' Specification Sections. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440- 1 B. Product Data for each plumbing fixture category and type specified. include selected fixture,trim,fittings, , accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions,construction details,and flow-control rates. C. Submit product data including rated capacities of selected models and weights(shipping,installation,and operation). Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components;and piping and wiring connections for the following plumbing specialty products: a. Hose bibbs. ' b. Yard hydrants. C. Cleanouts,cover plates,and access panels. , d. Vent caps,vent terminals,and roof flashing assemblies. e. Floor drains. £ Sleeve penetration systems. D. Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to include in the operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures,faucets,and other components of each category from one ' source and by a single manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements ofPublic Law 101-336,"Americans with Disabilities Act"regarding plumbing fixtures for physically handicapped people. C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures and components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. ' D. Select combinations of fixtures and trim,fanrxls,fittings,and other components that are compatible- E. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping,"for materials, products,and installation. ' F. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate capacities, sizes, and dimensional requirements of system components. Components having equal performance characteristics that deviate from the indicated size and ' dimensions.may be considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept or intended performance. The burden of proof for equality ofproducts is on the Contractor. Refer to Division.1 Section. "Product Substitutions." ' 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing,crating,and covering. ' B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in dry location. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS ' A. Operating Keys(Handles): Furnish 1 extra key for each key-operated hose bibb installed. ' 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS , A. Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations and verify that plumbing fixtures ' can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. • PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440-2 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS • A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Wall Hydrants: a. Ancon,Inc. b. .Tones Manufacturing Co.,Inc. C. Josam Co. d. Smith by Iay R. Smith Mfg.Co.Div.,Smith Industries,Inc. ' e. Wade Div.,Tyler Pipe. £ Watts Regulator.Co. g. Woodford Manufacturing Co.Div.,WCM industries,Inc. h. Zurn by Hydromechanics Div.,Zurn Industries,Inc. b. Sleeve Penetration Systems: a. Proset Systems,Inc. 1` 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Piping specialties such as escutcheons,dielectric finings,sleeves,and sleeve seaes are specified in Division ' 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." 23 CLEANOUTS A. Floor cleanouts shall be Wade Series W-6000,or equal,with a coated cast iron body,spigot connection with PVC tapered plug,adjustable housing with a secured satin finish bronze top,sized as shown on drawings. B. Wall cleanout for PVC Piping shall be Type 1 PVC G&R Sloan Mfg.Co.,Part No.211 (x),or equal"T" • branch cleanout with tapered thread bronze plug tapped for center screw,sized as shown on drawings. ' Provide stainless steel cover,(size as required),for all wall cleanouts. 2.4 FLOOR DRAINS AND TRENCH DRAIN S A. General: Size outlets as indicated on Product Data Sheet or drawings. B. Floor Drains:FD-1.Floor drain shall be carefully installed and set level at proper elevation. Floor drains shall be Wade W-1100 series, or equal, with adjustable 6" diameter standard strainer with satin nickel bronze top. Drain body shall be inside caulk connection or "Ty Seal"at contractors option. Floor drain shall be installed with deep seal"P"trap,sized as shown on drawings. ' C. Trench Drains:Trench drains.shalI be concrete farmed in place as shown on the drawings. PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine roughing-in for potable,hot-and cold-water supply piping systems;soil, waste,and vent piping • systems;and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and locations and types of supports match those indicated, before installing and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data when 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440-3 roughing-in data are not indicated. B. Examine walls,floors,and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. , C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. • - 3.2 APPLICATIONS.' A. Include supports for plumbing fixtures according to the following: ' a. Carriers: For wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall construction. b. Chair Carriers: For wall-hanging urinals,lavatories,.sinks,drinking fountains,and electric water -' coolers. C. Heavy-Duty Chair Carriers: For accessible urinals,lavatories,and other fixtures where indicated. d. Reinforcement: For floor-mounted lavatories and sinks that require securing to wall and recessed, box-mounted,electric water coolers. ' e. Fabricate reinforcement from 2-by-d-inch or 2-by-+6-inch (38-by49-mm or 3g-by-140-mm)fire- retardant-treated-wood blocking between studs or 1!4-by-6-inch (6.35-by-152.4-mm) steel plates attached to studs,in wall construction,to secure fixtures to wall. Include length that will extend ' beyond ends of fixture mounting bracket and attach to at least 2 studs. 3.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Assemble plumbing fixtures and trim,fittings,faucets,and other components level and plumb according ' to manufacturers'written instructions,roughing-in drawings,and referenced standards. B. Install Handicapped Fixtures in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA). Mounting heights of fixtures,flush valves,.traps,etc.shall comply with ADA. C. Set shower receptors in leveling bed of cement grout. , • D. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture. Use gate or globe valve where specific stop valve is not specified. , E. install supply,flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves. F. Install faucet,flow-control fittings with.specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts when faucets are ' not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required. G. Install shower,flow-control fittings with.specified maximum flow rates in shower arms. ' HL Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on indirect wastes, except where otherwise indicated. , I. Install escutcheons at wall,floor,and ceiling penetrations in exposed,finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. J. Seal,joints between fixtures and walls;floors,and counters using sanitary-type;i-part,mildew-resistant, silicone sealant according to sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." Match sealant color to fixture color. ' 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general t arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: • PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440-4 a. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment specified in other Division 15 Sections. B. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this Section for fitting sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing fixture. C. Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect equipment with supply inlets,supply GPs,supply risers,and traps specified in this Section. Use fitting sizes required to match connected equipment..Connect fittings to plumbing piping. D. Ground equipment. a. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. E. Arrange for electric-power connections to fixtures and devices that require power. Electric power is specified in Division 16 Sections. S3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operate and adjust all faucets,flush valves,disposers,etc.. Replace damaged or malfunctioning equipment i Replace damaged or malfunctioning equipment B. Clean all fixtures,fittings,strainers,etc.using manufacturers recommended methods and products. _I 3.6 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings_ B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by Owner. �! 3.7 WATER CLOSET SCHEDULE A. Accessible Water Closet WC-1: Where plumbing fixtures ofthis designation are indicated,provide products complying with the following: a- Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated ' into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: b_ Vitreous-China Water Closet a. Carusoe Model CST714T,Toto. C. Toilet Seat a. #95,Olsonite Corp. _ d. Fixture Color: White. e. Bowl Type and Operation: Elongated,siphon jet ' E Mounting and Outlet Floor mounted,floor outlet g. Fixture Bolt Caps: White,china. _ h. Rim Height: 17.0 to 19.0 inches(445 to 457 mm). ' i. Tank Trim: Flushometer Tank. j. Accessible-Fixture Tank: Modified as required for lever mounting on side of tank that will be on wide side of fixture compartment k. Design Water Consumption: 1.6 gal.(6 L)per flushing cycle. ' 1. Toilet Seat Solid-plastic, water-closet seat with bumpers and hardware, compatible with water closet and as follows: a. Color: White. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440-5 b. Class: Commercial,Standard. ' C. Size: Elongated. d. Pattern: Open front without cover. 3.8 PIPING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION ' A. install cleanouts in above-ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not indicated,according to the following: ' a. Size same as drainage piping up to 4 inches(DN 100)size. Use 4 inches(DN 100)size for larger drainage piping except where larger size cleanout is indicated. b. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. ' C. Locate at minimum intervals of'50 feet(15 in)for piping 4 inches(DN 100)and smaller and 100 feet(30 m)for larger piping. d. Locate at base of each vertical soil or waste stack. , B. Install cleanout deck plates(covers),of types indicated,with top flush with finished floor,for floor cleanouts for piping below floors. C. Install cleanout wall access covers,oftypes indicated,with frame and cover flush with finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping_ D. Install flashing flange-and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors having waterproof membrane. 3.9 FLOOR DRAIN INSTALLATION , A. Install floor drains according to manufacturer's written instructions,in locations indicated. , B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained,or as indicated. Sett tops of drains flush with floor. C. Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as shown on structural drawings. If not , shown on structural drawings,set elevation to provide proper floor slope to drain as follows: a. 60 inches(1500 mm)Drain Area Radius: %s inch(13 mm)depression. ' b. 10 Foot(3000 mm)Drain Area Radius: 3/4 inch(19 mm)depression. c. . 15 Foot(4500 mm)Drain Area Radius: l inch(25 mm)depression. d. 20 Foot(6000 mm)Drain Area Radius: 1-1/4 inches(32 mm)depression. ' e. 25 Foot(7500 mm)Drain Area Radius: 1-12 inches(40 mm)depression. D. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. ' Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes,where penetrated. E. Position drains for easy accessibility and maintenance. 3.10 CONNECTIONS ' A. Supply Runoutsto Fixtures: Install hot-and cold-water supply piping ruaoutsto fixtures of sizes indicated, but not smaller bran required by plumbing code. B_ Drainage Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing frxftu=and drains, , with approved trap,of sizes indicated,but not smaller than required by plumbing code. C. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. S PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440-6 i 3.11 COMMISSIONING A. Preparation: Perform the following checks before start-up: • a. Systems tests are complete. b. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired. C. There is clear space for servicing of specialties. B. Before operating systems,perform these steps: a. Close drain valves,hydrants,and hose bibbs. b. Open valves to full open position. C. Verify drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder ofconstruction period to avoid dogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or when work stops. I� ' END OF SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440-7 • SECTION 16050-BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART I -.GENERAL ''. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Raceways. 2. Building wire and connectors. 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 4. Electricity-metering components. 5. Concrete equipment bases 6. Touchup painting. 7. Enclosed switches 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. .i C. RNC:Rigid nonmetallic conduit. D. RMC: Rigid metallic conduit. i g E. LFMC:Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. ' F. MC Cable-Metal-Clad Cable. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:Catalog data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Electrical Components,Devices,and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100 and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. • r BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050- 1 1.6 COORDINATION , A. Sequence,coordinate,and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the ' Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building. B. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnisbed by utility companies. ' 1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components. 2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS ' A. EMT: ANSI C80.3,zinc-coated steel,with set-screw or compression fittings. , B. FMC: Zinc-coated steel. C. LFMC: Zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket. ' D. RNC: NEMA TC 2,Schedule 40 PVC,with NEMA TC3 fittings. E. Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for the raceway type with which used. ' • 2.2 CONDUCTORS r A. Conductors,No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper. B. Conductors,Larger Than No. 10 AWG: Stranded copper. C. Insulation: Thermoplastic,rated at 75 deg C minimum. ' D. Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size,ampacity rating,material,type,and class suitable for service indicated. E. MC Cable:Metal-Clad Cable,outer shell shall be steel. -� 2.3 SUPPORTING DEVICES ' A. Material: Cold formed steel,with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel. C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports:Flange edges turned toward web,and 9/16-inch-(14-mm-)diameter slotted , holes at a maximum of 2 inches(50 nun)o.c.,in webs. • r BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-2 �t ' D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers,riser clamps,straps,threaded C-clamps with • retainers,ceiling trapeze hangers,wall brackets,and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers. E. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. ' 2.4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors ' prescribed by ANSI A 13.1,NFPA 70,and these Specifications. B. Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1,Table 3. C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Wires and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape,not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick(25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick). ' D. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent,bright-colored,continuous-printed,vinyl tape with the following features: 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick(150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick). 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line. E. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth,self-adhesive,wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. F. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon,self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme. 25 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete: 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive strength as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2.6 TOUCHUP PAINT A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish. ' B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. ' 2.7 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. Enclosed,Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1;Type HD,with lockable handle. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-3 A. Headroom Maintenance: Ifmounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom. B. Materials and Components: Install level,plumb,and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems , and components,unless otherwise indicated. _ C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service,maintenance,and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting,with minimum interference with other-installations. D. Right of Way. Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. ' 3.2 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Use the following raceways for outdoor installations: 1. Exposed:RMC. , 2. Concealed:RMC. 3. Underground, Single Run: RNC. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type 3R or Type 4. B. Use the following raceways for indoor.installations: 1. Exposed: EMT. 2. Concealed: EMT or MC cable. ' 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations, use LFMC. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. t 3.3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION A. Conceal raceways and cables,unless otherwise indicated,within finished walls,ceilings,and floors. ' B. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches(150 mm)away from parallel runs of stream or hot-water pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water piping. C. Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering. D. Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs ofbends in the same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel,unless otherwise indicated. E. Use raceway and cable fittings compatible with raceways and cables and suitable for use and location. ' F. Install raceways embedded in slabs in middle third of slab thickness where practical, and leave at least 1-inch(25-mm)concrete cover. 1. . Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. 2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. 3. Install conduit larger than I-inch trade size (DN27) parallel to or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where conduit is at right angles to reinforcement,place conduit close to slab support. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-4 ' 4. Make bends in exposed parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use • factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel;otherwise,provide field bends for exposed parallel raceways. 1 3.4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER&LIGHTING. ' A. Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN. ' B. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway where exposed. Metal-clad cable where concealed in ceilings and gypsum board partitions. ' 3.5 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better ' mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. B. Install wiring at outlets with at least 6 inches(300 nun)of slack conductor at each outlet C. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A. 3.6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION ' A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system • components. ' B. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads,times a safety factor of at least four; tminimum of 200-1b(90-kg)design load. ­1 SUPPORT INSTALLATION I ' A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components. B. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch(38-mm)and smalIerraceways serving lighting and mceptaclebranch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports. ' C. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports,with no weight load on raceway terminals. ' D. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated: ' 1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails. 2. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts. 3. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-:5 1 1 1 3.8 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES • A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. , B. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling,for exterior underground power, control,signal,and communication lines located directly above power and communication lines. Locate t 6 tog inches(150 to 200 mm)below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches(400 mm),overall,use a single line marker. 3.9 UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT ' A. Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding as required by utility company. 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. On completion ofinstallation,including outlets,fittings,and devices,inspect exposed finish. Remove buns, , dirt,paint spots,and construction debris. B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings,finishes,and cabinets ' are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. • END OF SECTION 16050 ' 1 1 • BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-6 t I • SECTION 16060-GROUNDING AND BONDING 'i PART 1 -GENERAL i 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Ground rods. • 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components,Devices,and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100 and marked for intended use. 1. Comply with UL 467. PART 2.-PRODUCTS 1! 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 'i j B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Grounding Conductors,Cables,Connectors,and Rods: a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. b. Boggs,Inc. C. Chance/Hubbell. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060- 1 d. Copperweld Corp. , e. Dossert Corp. L Erico Inc.;Electrical Products Group. • _ g. Framatome ConnectorsBurndy Electrical. , h. Galvan Industries,Inc. i. Harger Lightning Protection,Inc. j. Hastings Fiber Glass Products,Inc. k. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co. 1. Ideal Industries,Inc. m. ILSCO. _ ----. . .. n. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. o. Korns: C.C.Korns Co.;Division of Robroy Industries. p. Lightning Master Corp. q. Lyncole XIT Grounding. , r. O-Z/Gedney Co.;a business of the EGS Electrical Group. S.- Raco,Inc.;Division of Hubbell. t. Robbins Lightning,Inc. ' U. Salisbury: W.H. Salisbury&Co. v. Superior Grounding Systems,Inc. W. Thomas&Betts,Electrical. :1 2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. For insulated conductors,comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." ' B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation. ' C. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. D. Underground Conductors: Bare,tinned,stranded,unless otherwise indicated. ' E. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following: 1. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B S. ' 2. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 1 2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467;listed for use for specific types,sizes,and combinations of conductors ' and connected items. B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written , instructions. 2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel. ' B. Ground Rods: Sectional type; copper-clad steel. • GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-2 i 1,. 1. Size: 5/8 by 96 inches(6 bn°2400 mm)in diameter. i • PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete,masonry,crushed stone,and similar materials. ' B. In raceways,use insulated equipment grounding conductors. C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for underground connections. D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps. 1, i 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NFPA 70,Article 250,for types,sizes,and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types,larger sizes,or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated. 1, B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all-feeders and circuits. C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items,in addition to those required by NEC: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 1i 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Flexible raceway runs. 6. Metal-clad cable runs. i D. Water Heater Heating Cables: Install a separate equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater cable. Bond conductor to heater units,piping,connected equipment,and components. '! 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Ground Rods: 4 1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating. B. Metal Water Service Pipe:Provide insulated copper grounding conductors,in conduit,from building's main service equipment,or grounding bus,to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-3 water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding ' conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. C. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe ' with grounding clamp connectors. 3.4 CONNECTIONS ' A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware,conductors,and connection methods so metals indirect contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points ' closer to order of galvanic series. Z. Make connections with clean,bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. ' 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration , of moisture to contact surfaces. B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed , up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No.8 AWG and larger,use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller.grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type ' connectors. D. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's , published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. END OF SECTION 16060 ' 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-4 ' ' SECTION 16120-CONDUCTORS AND CABLES • PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for ' wiring systems rated 600 V and less. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components,Devices,and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100 • and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists,the following requirements apply PP Y for product selection: ,. 1. Available Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the manufacturers ' specified. ' 2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers, or equal: ' 1. American Insulated Wire Corp.: a Leviton Company. • 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Senator Wire&Cable Company. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120-1 4. Southwire Company. ' 5. Integral Cablecon. • B. Refer to Part 3"Conductor and Insulation Applications"Article for insulation type,cable construction,and I ratings. . C. Conductor Material: Copper;stranded conductor , D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN. E. Multiconductor Cable: Metal-clad cable,Type MC,outer shell shall be steel. , 2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers,or equal: ' 1. AFC Cable Systems,Inc. 2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 3. Hubbell/Anderson. , 4. O-Z/Gedney,EGS Electrical Group LLC. 5. 3M Company;Electrical Products Division. B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size,ampacity rating,material, type, and class for application and service indicated. ' 2.4 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES EXECUTION A. Each Telephone Outlet shall have two(2)Category Se cables run to the telephone enclosure. Category 5e , cables shall be unshielded cable consisting of four twisted pair of#24 AWG solid conductors, meeting Category 5e specifications. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in a raceway. B. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings,Walls,and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in ' raceway or Metal-clad cable,Type MC. C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN,single conductors ' in a raceway. D. Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN,single conductors in raceway. , 3.2 INSTALLATION • CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120-2 ' A. Conceal cables in finished walls,ceilings,and floors,unless otherwise indicated. • B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means,including fish tape,cable,rope,and basket-weave wire/cable grips,that will not damage cables or raceway. ' D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. ' E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 33 CONNECTIONS ' A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. ' B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and.possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. ' C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductors at each outlet,with at least 6 inches(150 mm.)of slack. • ' END OF SECTION 16120 1 r • 1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120- 3 ' SECTION 16130-RACEWAYS AND BOXES • PART 1 -GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways,fittings,boxes,enclosures,and cabinets for electrical wiring. ' B. Related Sections include the following: ' 1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, ar.-d identification products. 2. Division 2 Section"Trenching,Backfilling,and Compaction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing. C. RMC:Rigid metallic conduit. ' D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. F. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Catalog data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Electrical Components,Devices,and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100 and marked for intended use. ' B. Comply with NFPA 70. • ' RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 1 1.6 COORDINATION , • A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, cabinets, and suspension system with other , construction. PART 2-PRODUCTS i 2.1 MANUFACTURERS i A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists,the following requirements apply for product selection: ' 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offeringproduc*s that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING , A. Manufacturers,or equal: , 1. AFC Cable Systems,Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. ' 3. Anamet Electrical,Inc.;Anaconda Metal Hose. • 4. Electri-Flex Co. S. Grinnell Co./Tyco International;Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. ' 7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. S. O-Z Gedney,Unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Co. , B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. ' C. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. 1. Fittings:Set-screw or compression type. , D. FMC:Zinc-coated steel. E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. , F. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials. 2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Manufacturers,or equal: , 1. American International. • RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-2 ' 2. Anamet Electrical,Inc.;Anaconda Metal Hose. • 3. Amco Corp. ' 4. Cantex Inc. 5. Certainteed Corp.;Pipe&Plastics Group. 6. Condux International. 7. ElecSYS,Inc. S. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson &Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10.. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. ' 11. RACO;Division of Hubbell,Inc. 12. Spiralduct,Inc./AFC Cable Systems,Inc. 13. Thomas&Betts Corporation. B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40. ' C. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3;match to conduit or tubing type and material. ' D.. LFNC: UL 1660. 2.4 BOXES,ENCLOSURES,AND CABINETS ' A. Manufacturers,or equal: ' 1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds;Div.of Cooper Industries,Inc. • 2. Emerson/General Signal;Appleton Electric Company. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 4. Hoffman. ' 5. Hubbell,Inc.;Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 6. O-Z/Gedney;Unit of General Signal. 7. RACO;Division of Hubbell,Inc. ' S. Robroy Industries,Inc.;Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.;Adalet-PLM Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. ' 11. Thomas&Betts Corporation. .12. Walker Systems,Inc.;Wiremold Company(The). . 13. Woodhead,Daniel Company,Woodhead Industries,Inc. Subsidiary. ' B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1,Type FD,with gasketed cover. ' D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION • A. Outdoors: RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-3 1. Exposed:RMC. • 2. Underground: RNC. ' 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type 3R. B. Indoors: 1. Exposed: EMT. ' 2. Concealed: EMT or MC cable. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment(Including.Transformers and Hydraulic,Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid,or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC. , 4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type 1,except as follows: 5. Hazardous Areas:RMC C. Minimum Raceway Size: %:-inch trade size. ' D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. E. Contractor shall use conduit seals for hazardous locations as required by the NFPA 70. , 3.2 INSTALLATION ' A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches(150 mm)away from parallel runs of hot-water pipes. Install horizonal raceway runs above water. ' B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. • C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." ' D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions o::hones , are not visible above the finished slab. F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs ' of offsets parallel,unless otherwise indicated. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors,unless otherwise indicated. ' H. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. 1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. I. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools. , J. Terminations: 1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts,one inside and one outside box. • RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-4 ' 2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs,screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box;tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed. ' K. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration,noise transmission, or movement;and for all motors. ' L. Surface Raceways: Install a separ ate,green.,ground conductor in raceways from junction box sup piving raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals. ' M. Comply with Division 2 Section"Trenching,Backfilling and Compaction." ' 3.3 PROTECTION A. Provide-final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes,and cabinets ara without ' damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufactur—... 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended ny ' manufacturer. ' 3.4 CLEANING A. After completing installation of exposed,factory-finished raceways and boxes,inspect exposed finishes and ' repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 16130 1 1 i ' RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130- 5 1 I SECTION 16140- WIRING DEVICES • PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and ' Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes receptacles, connectors,switches,and finish plates. 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product specified. ' B. Samples: For devices and device plates for color selection and evaluation of technical features as requested • by Engineer. ' C. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components,Devices,and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, ' by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with NEMA WD 1. ' C. Comply with NFPA 70. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: • B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: ' 1. Wiring Devices: WIRING DEVICES 16140- 1 a. Bryant Electric,Inc. ' b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co.,Inc. • C. GE Company,GE Wiring Devices. d. Hubbell,Inc.,Wiring Devices Div. ' e. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. £ Leviton Manufacturing Co.,Inc. g. Pass&Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. h. Pyle-National,Inc.;an Amphenol Co. ' 2.2 RECEPTACLES ' A. Straight-Blade: 5-2011,specification grade. Push in connections will not be allowed. B. GFCI Receptacles: Feed-through type,with integral NEMA WD 6,Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle ' arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch-(70-mm-)deep outlet box without an adapter. 2.3 SWITCHES A. Snap Switches:20Amp,specification grade,quiet type. Push in connections will not be allowed. ' 2.4 WALL PLATES ' A. Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices. I. Material: 0.04-inch-(1-mm-)thick,Type 302,satin-finished stainless steel. ' B. Color of outlets as selected by Engineer. ' 2.5 FINISHES A. Color: Manufacturers standard,as selected by Engineer. , PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION ' A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure. B. Install wall plates when painting is complete. , C. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. , D. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets and telephone/power service poles are installed to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION • WIRING DEVICES 16140-2 , i A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." • 1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated, identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate. I3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch-circuit equipment grounding conductor. ' B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque-tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. I 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at least six times. B. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer`s written 1 instructions. C. Replace damaged or defective components. 1 3.5 CLEANING A. Internally clean devices,device outlet boxes,and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wail • plates or devices. 1 END OF SECTION 16140 1 • 1 ' WIRING DEVICES 16140- 3 SECTION 16442-PANELBOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions anti Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes load centers and panelboards,overcurrent protective devices,and associated equipment rated 600 V and less for the following types: ' 1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFC1: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. ' C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. • D. RMS: Root mean square. ' E. SPDT: Single pole,double throw. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent.protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,ratings,and finishes. ' B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration,current,and voltage ratings. C. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective ' devices and auxiliary components. • ' PANELBOARDS 16442- 1 2. Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and ' field-installed wiring. • 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NEMA PB 1. ' B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION ... A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates 1 walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,raceways, piping;and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS IA MANUFACTURERS v� Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering roducts that A. Available � p req g P 1 may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: jB. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the followin;: , 1. Panelboards,Overcurrent Protective Devices,Controllers,Contactors,and Accessories: a. Eaton Corp.;Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.;Electrical Distribution&Control Div. C. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc. , d. Square D Co. 2.2 FABRICATION AND FEATURES A. Enclosures:Surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1,Type 1,to meet environmental conditions at installed 1 location. B. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted'fronts,matchbox dimensions;for 1 flush-mounted fronts,overlap box. 1 C. Hinged Front Cover. Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. ' D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat. E. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover,mounted inside metal frame,inside panelboard door. 1 F. Bus: Copper. • • 1 PANELBOARDS 16442-2 1 ' G. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. H. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors;bonded to - ' box. I. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for firture �. installation of devices. ' 2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING A. UL label indicating series-connected rating of 22,000 AIC minimum. Include size and type of upstream device allowable,branch devices allowable,and UL series-connected short-circuit rating. 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Branch Overcutrent Protective Devices:Bolt-on circuit breakers,replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Mounting Heights:.Top of trim 74 inches(1880 mm)above finished floor,unless otherwise mnt i. ' C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion ofbox. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniior miy flush with wall finish. ' D. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory,handwritten directories are not acceptable. ' E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. ' 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. 3.3 CONNECTIONS ' A. Install equipment grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuityto main electrical ground • bus. PANELBOARDS 16442- 3 B. Tighten electrical connectors andterminals,according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. 1 If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 CLEANING A. On completion of installation,inspect interior and exterior ofpanelboards.Remove paint splatters and other ' spots. Vacuum dirt and debris;do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 16442 • 1 1 • PANELBOARDS 16442-4 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering disconnect • switches that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: ' B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide disconnect switches by one of the following: ' L. Disconnect Switches: a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.;Electrical Distribution and Control Division. C. General Switch Corp. d. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc. e. Square D Co. ' f. Westinghouse Electric Corp.;Distribution&Control Business Unit. ' 2? DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Enclosed,Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1,Type HD,with lockable handle. B. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1,Type 1,unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed location. ' 1. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R 2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. • PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION ' A. Install disconnect switches in locations as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install disconnect switches level and plumb. ' C. Install wiring between disconnect switches and indication devices. D. Connect disconnect.switches and circuit breakers and components.to wiring system and to ground as ' indicated and instructed by manufacturer. 1. Tighten electrical connectorsand terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening ' values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. E. Identify each disconnect switch according to requirements specified in Division 16 Section"Basic Electrical ' Materials and Methods." 3.2 CLEANING A. After completing system installation,including outlet fittings and devices,inspect exposed finish. Remove ' burrs, dirt,and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips,scratches, and abrasions. ' DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16476-2 END OF SECTION 16476 ' • • DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16476-3 • SECTION 16521 -INTERIOR&EXTERIOR LIGHTING ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and ' Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior lighting units with luminaires, lamps, ballasts,.interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units,and accessories. 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Lighting Unit: A luminaire or an assembly of luminaires complete with a common support,including pole, post,or other structure,and mounting and support accessories. ' B. Luminaire (Light Fixture): A complete lighting device consisting of lamp(s) and ballast(s), when • applicable,together with parts designed to distribute light,to position and protect lamps, and to connect lamps to power supply. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting unit indicated, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories,finishes,and the following: ' 1. Materials and dimensions of luminaires and poles. 2. Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical ratings and photometric data. ' 3. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance. 4. High-intensity-discharge luminaire ballasts. 5. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger. 6. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts. ' 7. Types of lamps. B. Shop Drawings: Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. ' C. Comply with ANSI C2. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1 • PART 2-PRODUCTS 1 INTERIOR&EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 - 1 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS • A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the ' Work include,but are not limited to,the products indicated on the contract drawings. 2.2 LUMINAIRES A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners,and edges. ' B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum,unless otherwise indicated. Form and support ' to prevent warping and sagging. C. Housings: Rigidly formed,weather-and light-tight enclosures that will not warp,sag,or deform in use. D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal.Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating ' conditions,and arranged to permit relamping without use oftools. Arrange doors,frames,lenses,diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling.during relamping and when secured in operating position. , Provide for door removal for cleaning or replacing lens. E. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging,exposure to heat,and ultraviolet ' radiation. F. Exterior Lenses and Refractors: Materials as indicated. Use heat-and aging-resistant,resilient gaskets.to sea]and cushion lens and refractor in luminaire doors. , G. Photoelectric Relays: As follows: • 1. Relay Mounting: In luminaire housing. ' H High-Intensity-Discharge Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.4. Constant wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Single-Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of minus 40 deg C. 2. Open-circuit operation will.not reduce average life. ' 3. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Equip with a solid-state igniter/starter having an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter case temperature of 90 deg C. 4. Noise: Uniformly quiet operation,with a noise rating of B or better. I. Lamps: Comply with the standard of the ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp. Provide luminaires with indicated lamps of designated type, characteristics,and wattage. , 2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS ' A. General Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated,features include the following: , 1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output. • 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. INTERIOR&EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 -2 i 3. Sound Rating: A. IB. Electromagnetic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Unless otherwise indicated,features include the following, besides those in "General Requirements"Paragraph above: I 1. Type: Energy saving. 2. Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. 3. Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound. 2.4 LAMPS ' A. Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color-Rendering Index: 3500 K and 85 CRI, unless otherwise indicated. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Lamp luminaires with indicated lamps according to manufacturer's written instructions. Replace 1 malfunctioning lamps. ' 3.2 CONNECTIONS • A. Ground equipment. ' 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not.indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and ' UL 486B. ' 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged units. ' 3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING ' A. Clean units after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 1 3.5 LIGHTING SCHEDULE • A. See drawings for lighting schedule. 1 • END OF SECTION 16521 1 INTERIOR&EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 - 3 ' I END OF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS � ' 1 ' Federal Funds To be Used i ' The City of Jefferson is a recipient of Federal Transit Administration funds; therefore, the following requirements shall be fully considered in preparing bids and performing work under ' any resulting award. No Obligation by the Federal Government. 1 (1) The Purchaser and Contractor acknowledge and agree that, notwithstanding any concurrence by the Federal Government in or approval of the solicitation or award of the underlying contract, absent the express written consent by the Federal Government, the Federal Government is not a party to this contract and shall not be subject to any obligations or liabilities to the Purchaser, Contractor, or any other party (whether or not a party to that contract) pertaining to any matter resulting from the underlying contract. (2) The Contractor agrees to include the above clause in each subcontract ' financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. It is further agreed that the clause shall not be modified, except to identify the subcontractor who will be subject to its provisions. • Program Fraud and False or Fraudulent Statements or Related Acts. ' (1) The Contractor acknowledges that the provisions of the Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act of 1986, as amended, 31 U.S.C. § 3801 et sea. and U.S. DOT regulations, "Program Fraud Civil Remedies," 49 C.F.R. Part 31, apply to its actions pertaining to this Project. Upon execution of the underlying ' contract, the Contractor certifies or affirms the truthfulness and accuracy of any statement it has made, it makes, it may make, or causes to be made, pertaining to the underlying contract or the FTA assisted project ' for which this contract work is being performed. In addition to other penalties that may be applicable, the Contractor further acknowledges that if it makes, or causes to be made, a false, fictitious, or fraudulent claim, statement, submission, or certification, the Federal Government reserves the right to impose the penalties of the Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act of 1,986 on the Contractor to the extent the Federal ' Government deems appropriate. (2) The Contractor also acknowledges that if it makes, or causes to be ' made, a false, fictitious, or fraudulent claim, statement, submission, or certification to the Federal Government under a contract connected with ' a project that is financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance 1 originally awarded by FTA under the authority of 49 U.S.C. § 5307, the , Government reserves the right to impose the penalties of 18 U.S.C. § 1001 and 49 U.S.C. § 5307(n)(1) on the Contractor, to the extent the Federal ' Government deems appropriate. (3) The Contractor agrees to include the above two clauses in each , subcontract financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. It is further agreed that the clauses shall not be modified, except to identify the subcontractor who will be subject to the provisions. Access to Records The following access to records requirements apply to this Contract: 1. Where the Purchaser is not a State but a local government and is the ' FTA Recipient or a subgrantee of the FTA Recipient in accordance with 49 C. F. R. 18.36(), the Contractor agrees to provide the Purchaser, the FTA , Administrator, the Comptroller General of the United States or any of their authorized representatives access to any books, documents, papers and , records of the Contractor which are directly pertinent to this contract for the purposes of making audits, examinations, excerpts and transcriptions. Contractor also agrees, pursuant to 49 C. F. R. 633.17 to provide the FTA ' Administrator or his authorized representatives including any PMO • Contractor access to Contractor's records and construction sites pertaining to a major capital project, defined at 49 U.S.C. 530201, which is ' receiving federal financial assistance through the programs described at 49 U.S.C. 5307, 5309 or 5311. 2. Where the Purchaser is a State and is the FTA Recipient or a subgrantee ' of the FTA Recipient in accordance with 49 C.F.R. 633.17, Contractor agrees to provide the Purchaser, the FTA Administrator or his authorized , representatives, including an PMO Contractor, access to the Contractor's Y , records and construction sites pertaining to a major capital project, ' defined at 49 U.S.C. 5302(a)1, which is receiving federal financial assistance through the programs described at 49 U.S.C. 5307, 5309 or 5311. By definition, a major capital project excludes contracts of less than the ' simplified acquisition threshold currently set at $100,000. 3. Where the Purchaser enters into a negotiated contract for other than a ' small purchase or under the simplified acquisition threshold and is an institution of higher education, a hospital or other non-profit organization and is the FTA Recipient or a subgrantee of the FTA Recipient in ' accordance with 49 C.F.R. 19.48, Contractor agrees to provide the • Purchaser, FTA Administrator, the Comptroller General of the United States or any of their duly authorized representatives with access to any books, documents, papers and record of the Contractor which are directly ' pertinent to this contract for the purposes of making audits, examinations, excerpts and transcriptions. ' 4. Where any Purchaser which is the FTA Recipient or a subgrantee of the FTA Recipient in accordance with 49 U.S.C. 5325(a) enters into a contract ' for a capital project or improvement (defined at 49 U.S.C. 5302(a)1) through other than competitive bidding, the Contractor shall make available records related to the contract to the Purchaser, the Secretary of ' Transportation and the Comptroller General or any authorized officer or employee of any of them for the purposes of conducting an audit and inspection. ' 5. The Contractor agrees to permit any of the foregoing parties to reproduce by any means whatsoever or to copy excerpts and ' transcriptions as reasonably needed. ' 6. The Contractor agrees to maintain all books, records, accounts and reports required under this contract for a period of not less than three years after the date of termination or expiration of this contract, except ' in the event of litigation or settlement of claims arising from the • performance of this contract, in which case Contractor agrees to maintain same until the Purchaser, the FTA Administrator, the Comptroller General, or any of their duly authorized representatives, have disposed of all such litigation, appeals, claims or exceptions related thereto. Reference 49 CFR 18.39(1)(11). 7. FTA does not require the inclusion of these requirements in subcontracts. ' Federal Changes ' The contractor shall at all times comply with all applicable FTA regulations, policies, procedures and directives, including without limitation those listed directly or by reference in the Agreement (Form FTA MA(10) dated October, 2003) between Purchaser and FTA, as they may be amended or promulgated from time to time during the term of this contract. ' Contractor's failure to so comply shall constitute a material breach of this contract. ' Civil Rights The following requirements apply to the underlying contract: (1) Nondiscrimination - In accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 2000d, section 303 of the Age Discrimination Act of ' 1975, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 6102, section 202 of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, 42 U.S.C. § 12132, and Federal transit law at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees that it will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, national origin, sex, age, or disability. In addition, the Contractor agrees to , comply with applicable Federal implementing regulations and other implementing requirements FTA may issue. (2) Equal Employment Opportunity - The following equal employment ' opportunity requirements apply to the underlying contract: (a) Race Color Creed National Ori in Sex - In accordance with Title , VII of the Civil Rights Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 2000e, and Federal transit laws at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable ' equal employment opportunity requirements of U.S. Department of Labor (U.S. DOL) regulations, "Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, ' Equal Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor," 41 C.F.R. Parts 60 et sue., (which implement Executive Order No. 11246, "Equal Employment Opportunity," as amended by Executive Order No. 11375, "Amending , Executive Order 11246 Relating to Equal Employment Opportunity," 42 U.S.C. § 2000e note), and with any applicable Federal statutes, executive orders, regulations, and Federal policies that may in the future affect ' construction activities undertaken in the course of the Project. The Contractor agrees to take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without , regard to their race, color, creed, national origin, sex, or age. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, , upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. In addition, the ' Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue. (b) Age - In accordance with section 4 of the Age Discrimination in , Employment Act of 1967, as amended, 29 U.S.C. § § 623 and Federal transit law at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees to refrain from ' discrimination against present and prospective employees for reason of age. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue. ' ' ( c) Disabilities - In accordance with section 102 of the Americans with Disabilities Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 12112, the Contractor agrees that it ' will comply with the requirements of U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, "Regulations to Implement the Equal Employment Provisions ' of the Americans with Disabilities Act," 29 C.F.R. Part 1630, pertaining to employment of persons with disabilities. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue. ' (3) The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided ' by FTA, modified only if necessary to identify the affected parties. Termination of Contract ' a. Termination for Convenience (General Provision) The (Recipient) ma p V ' terminate this contract, in whole or in part, at any time bV written notice to the Contractor when it is in the Government's best interest. The Contractor shall be paid its costs, including contract close-out costs, and profit on work performed up to the time of termination. The Contractor shall promptly submit its termination claim to (Recipient) to be paid the Contractor. If the Contractor has any property in its possession belonging to the (Recipient), the Contractor will account for the same, and dispose of it in the manner the (Recipient) directs. b. Termination for Default [Breach or Cause] (General Provision) If the Contractor does not deliver supplies in accordance with the contract delivery schedule, or, if the contract is for services, the Contractor fails to ' perform in the manner called for in the contract, or if the Contractor fails to comply with any other provisions of the contract, the (Recipient) may ' terminate this contract for default. Termination shall be effected by serving a notice of termination on the contractor setting forth the manner in which the Contractor is in default. The contractor will only be ' paid the contract price for supplies delivered and accepted, or services performed in accordance with the manner of performance set forth in the contract. ' If it is later determined by the (Recipient) that the Contractor had an excusable reason for not performing, such as a strike, fire, or flood, events ' which are not the fault of or are beyond the control of the Contractor, the (Recipient), after setting up a new delivery of performance schedule, may allow the Contractor to continue work, or treat the termination as a termination for convenience. c. Opportunity to Cure (General Provision) The (Recipient) in its sole discretion may, in the case of a termination for breach or default, allow ' the Contractor [an appropriately short period of time] in which to cure a the defect. In such case, the notice of termination will state the time ' period in which cure is permitted and other appropriate conditions If Contractor fails to remedy to (Recipient)'s satisfaction the breach , or default of any of the terms, covenants, or conditions of this Contract within [ten (10) days] after receipt by Contractor of written notice from (Recipient) setting forth the nature of said breach or default, (Recipient) shall have the right to terminate the Contract without any further obligation to Contractor. Any such termination for default shall not in any , way operate to preclude (Recipient) from also pursuing all available remedies against Contractor and its sureties for said breach or default. d. waiver of Remedies for any Breach In the event that (Recipient) , elects to waive its remedies for any breach by Contractor of any covenant, term or condition of this Contract, such waiver by (Recipient) shall not , limit (Recipient)'s remedies for any succeeding breach of that or of any other term, covenant, or condition of this Contract. , e. Termination for Convenience (professional or Transit Service Contracts) The (Recipient), by written notice, may terminate this ' contract, in whole or in part, when it is in the Government's interest. if this contract is terminated, the Recipient shall be liable only for payment under the payment provisions of this contract for services rendered ' before the effective date of termination. f. Termination for Default (Supplies and Service) If the Contractor fails ' to deliver supplies or to perform the services within the time specified in this contract or any extension or if the Contractor fails to comply with any other provisions of this contract, the (Recipient) may terminate this ' contract for default. The (Recipient) shall terminate by delivering to the Contractor a Notice of Termination specifying the nature of the default. ' The Contractor will only be paid the contract price for supplies delivered and accepted, or services performed in accordance with the manner or performance set forth in this contract. ' If, after termination for failure to fulfill contract obligations, it is determined that the Contractor was not in default, the rights and , obligations of the parties shall be the same as if the termination had been issued for the convenience of the Recipient. j. Termination for Convenience of Default (Cost-Type Contracts) The 1 (Recipient) may terminate this contract, or any portion of it, by serving a , 1 notice or termination on the Contractor. The notice shall state whether • the termination is for convenience of the (Recipient) or for the default of ' the Contractor. If the termination is for default, the notice shall state the manner in which the contractor has failed to perform the requirements of the contract. The Contractor shall account.for any property in its ' possession paid for from funds received from the (Recipient), or property supplied to the Contractor by the (Recipient). If the termination is for default, the (Recipient) may fix the fee, if the contract provides for a fee, ' to be paid the contractor in proportion to the value, if any, of work . performed up to the time of termination. The Contractor shall promptly ' submit its termination claim to the (Recipient) and the parties shall negotiate the termination settlement to be paid the Contractor. If the termination is for the convenience of the (Recipient), the ' Contractor shall be paid its contract close-out costs, and a fee, if the contract provided for payment of a fee, in proportion to the work performed up to the time of termination. ' If, after serving a notice of termination for default, the (Recipient) determines that the Contractor has an excusable reason for not ' performing, such as strike, fire, flood, events which are not the fault of and are beyond the control of the contractor, the (Recipient), after setting up a new work schedule, may allow the Contractor to continue work, or • treat the termination as a termination for convenience. ' Disadvantaged Business Enterprise To the extent required bV Federal law, regulation, or directive, the ' Recipient agrees to take the following measures to facilitate participation by disadvantaged business enterprises (DBE) in the Project: (1) The Recipient agrees and assures that it will comply with TEA-21 § 1101(b), 23 U.S.C. § 101 note, and U.S. DOT regulations, "Participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises in Department of Transportation ' Financial Assistance Programs," 49 C.F.R. Part 26. ' (2) The Recipient agrees and assures that it shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color., sex, or national origin in the award and performance of any third party contract, or subagreement supported ' with Federal assistance derived from U.S. DOT or in the administration of its DBE program and will comply with the requirements of 49 C.F.R. Part 26. The Recipient agrees to take all necessary and reasonable steps set ' forth in 49 C.F.R. Part 26 to ensure nondiscrimination in the award and • administration of all third party contracts and subagreements supported with Federal assistance derived from U.S. DOT. As required bV 49 C.F.R. 1 Part 26 and approved by U.S. DOT, the Recipients DBE program is incorporated by reference and made part of the Grant Agreement or • Cooperative Agreement. The Recipient agrees that implementation of , this DBE program is a legal obligation, and that failure to carry out its terms shall be treated as a violation of the Grant Agreement or Cooperative Agreement. Upon notification by U.S. DOT to the Recipient of its failure to implement its approved DBE program, U.S. DOT may impose sanctions as provided for under 49 C.F.R. Part 26 and may, in appropriate cases, refer the matter for enforcement under 18 U.S.C. § 1001, and/or the , Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act, 31 U.S.C. §§ 3801 et seq. Incorporation of FTA Terms ' The Recipient and contractor certify that terms in FTA C 4220.1E which , replaces FTA C4220.1D will be incorporated into contracts and sub- contracts. suspension and Debarment , This contract is a covered transaction for purposes of 49 CFR Part 29. As , such, the contractor is required to verify that none of the contractor, its principals, as defined at 49 CFR 29.995, or affiliates, as defined at 49 CFR ' 29.905, are excluded or disqualified as defined at 49 CFR 29.940 and 29.945. • The contractor is required to comply with 49 CFR 29, Subpart C and must ' include the requirement to comply with 49 CFR 29, Subpart C in any lower tier covered transaction it enters into. By signing and submitting its bid or proposal, the bidder or proposer ' certifies as follows: The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact relied ' upon by the City of Jefferson. It if is later determined that the bidder or proposer knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to remedies available to the City of Jefferson, the Federal Government may ' pursue available remedies, including but not limited to suspension and/or debarment. The bidder or proposer agrees to comply with the , requirements of 49 CFR 29, Subpart C while this offer is valid and throughout the period of any contract that may arise from this offer. The bidder or proposer further agrees to include a provision requiring such ' compliance in its lower tier covered transactions. Davis Bacon and Copeland Anti-Kickback Acts ' (1) Minimum wages - (U All laborers and mechanics employed or working ' upon the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 • or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by ' the Secretary Of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those ' contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and ' such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis- ' Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for ' more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such ' laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR Part ' 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each 1 classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classifications and wage rates conformed under paragraph MOD of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site ' of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. OWN The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate ' and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) Except with respect to helpers as defined as 29 CFR 5.2(n)(4), the work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination; and (4) With respect to helpers as defined in 29 CFR 5.2(n)(4), such a classification prevails in the area in which the work is performed. (B) If the , contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the • classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting , officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the , Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every ' additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day ' period that additional time is necessary. ( C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the , proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the , recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the ' contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. ' (D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) (B) or ©) of this section, shall be ' paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the , contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona ' fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the 1 Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate , account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. • M(A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or 1 mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to i be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefor only when the following criteria have been met: (1) The work to be performed ' by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (B) If the contractor and the 1 laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, Washington, DC 20210. ' The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting ' officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. ( C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do ' not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the ' contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized ' representative, will issue a determination with 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (D) The wage rate 1 (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(v) (B) or ( C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first 1 day on which work is performed in the classification. (2) withholding - The City of Jefferson shall upon its own action or upon written request of an 1 authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally- 1 assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued Payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and ' mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the • contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including 1 any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the • Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), all , or part of the wages required by the contract, the City of Jefferson may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further ' payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. (3) Payrolls and basic records - (1) Payrolls and basic records ' relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section ' 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer , or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) , of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program ' has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees , under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios ' and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (ii)(A) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the City of Jefferson for transmission , to the Federal Transit Administration. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be , maintained under section 5.5(a)(3)(1) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5. This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents (Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1), U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all ' subcontractors. (B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a • "Statement of Compliance," signed by the contractor or subcontractor or 1 ' his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons • employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (1) That the ' payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under section 5.5(a)(3)(I) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5 and that such information is correct and complete; (2) That each laborer or ' mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no ' deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid ' not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. ( C) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for ' submission of the "Statement of Compliance" required by paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section. (D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or ' criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18'and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code. (iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a)(3)(I) of this section ' available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the Federal Transit Administration or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Federal ' agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, ' failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. (4) Apprentices and trainees - (1) Apprentices - Apprentices will ' be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. ' Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency ' recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable r 1 ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft 1 classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the i contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any , worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the , classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under ' the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than 1 that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable , wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices , must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator of the , Wage and Hour Division of the U.S. Department of Labor determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event , the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to , utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) Trainees - Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work ' at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than , permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full • amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the i Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an • apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan ' approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage ' rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal employment opportunity - The utilization of apprentices, trainees and ' journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR part 30. ' 1. (5) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements - The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract. (6) Subcontracts - The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the Federal Transit Administration may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5. (7) Contract termination: debarment - A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 ' may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. (8) Compliance ' with Davis-Bacon and Related Act requirements - All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. (9) Disputes concerning labor standards - Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in ' accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the ' contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or • their representatives. (10) Certification of eligibility - (I) By entering into ' this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of • section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (ii) No part of this , contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (iii) The penalty for making false statements is ' prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards(1) overtime requirements - No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract ' work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (2) , Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages - In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section the , contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States for liquidated damages. Such liquidated , damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each ' calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of , this section. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages - The City of Jefferson, Transit Division shall upon its own action or upon , written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any , such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime , contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (2) of , this section. (4) Subcontracts - The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include ' these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be • responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier ' i ' subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1) through (4) of • this section. Seismic Safety 1. The contractor agrees that any new building or addition to an existing building will be designed and constructed in accordance with the standards for Seismic Safety required in ' Department of Transportation Seismic Safety Regulations 49 CFR Part 41 and will certify to compliance to the extent required by the regulation. The contractor also agrees to ensure that all 1 work performed under this contract including work performed by a subcontractor is in compliance with the standards required by the Seismic Safety Regulations and the certification of compliance issued on the project. ' Energy Conservation Requirements ' The contractor agrees to comply with mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the state energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and ' Conservation Act. ADA Access ' All design and construction shall fully consider and comply with the requirements of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990. ' PROTEST PROCEDURE • For all bids not exempted from the competitive bidding procedures,the City of Jefferson will provide a tabulation of bids and recommendation for award by telephone, fax, or mail to all responding bidders. Bidders wishing to challenge the award decision shall have a specified ' time, as listed on the recommendation for award, to file a bid protest with the purchasing agent. The protest period will be two (2)working days for telephone bids, ten(10) working days for informal written bids, and fifteen(15) working days for formal sealed bids. The protest must be filed in writing to the purchasing agent and must specify the grounds upon which the protest is based. A valid protest must 1) come from an actual bidder or offeror for the request, and 2) who claim to be the rightful award. That is,protest is not valid if filed by ' a bidder who cannot show they would be awarded the contract if their protest were accepted. The purchasing agent will review the protest and issue a written decision. If the bidder ' disagrees with the decision of the purchasing agent, the decision may be appealed to the finance director. The request for appeal must be filed within a specified time, as listed on the protest decision, with the purchasing agent. The request must describe the specific reason for the appeal ' and is limited to those matters that were raised in the original protest letter. The finance director will review the protest and issue a written decision. If the bidder is not satisfied, it may ask that.its protest be considered by the city administrator if the award is less ' than $25,000.00 or the city council if the award is in excess of$25,000.00. Any decision regarding the matter made by the city administrator or city council is final. • All protests will be reported to the Federal Transportation Administration. 1 1 PROMPT PAYMENT CLAUSE • The prime contractor agrees to pay each subcontractor under this prime contract for 1 satisfactory performance of its contract no later than thirty days from receipt of each payment the prime contract receives from City of Jefferson, Missouri. The prime contractor agrees further to ' return retainage payments to each subcontractor within thirty days after the subcontractors work is satisfactorily completed. Any delay or postponement of payment from the above referenced time frame may occur only for good cause following written approval of the City of Jefferson, , Missouri. This clause applies to both DBE and non-DBE subcontract. 1 , 1 1 1 1 • 1 z ® v) U 1 W z 1 O BUS TRANSFER STATION vil 1 820 Cho MLLER Q 1 0 z 1 0 GENERAL NOTES DRAWINGS 1 VERIFY LOCATION OF ALL UTILITIES 1 TITLE SHEET '�' N 1 2 PROTECT OWNERS PROPERTY& 2 SITE PLAN ,_„ w REPAIR ANY DAMAGE 3 BUS SHELTER PLAN ui 3 WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL 4 BUS SHELTER ELECTRICAL PLAN z o 1 STATE, FEDERAL AND LOCAL CODES 5 RESTROOM PLAN ~ 00 4 WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH CITY OF 6 RESTROOM ROOF PLAN JEFFERSON TECHNICAL 7 RESTROOM WALL SECTION m 1 SPECIFICATIONS 8 RESTROOM EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 9 RESTROOM INTERIOR ELEVATIONS m m I CA vi 10 RESTROOM PLUMBING PLAN p a a 11 RESTROOM,HVAC PLAN 1 12 RESTROOM ELECTRICAL PLAN 13 SITE DETAILS 14 ABBREVIATIONS 1 PROJECT NO.: 63015 1 DATE: 06-14-08 UTILITIES 1 MISSOURI AMERICAN WATER 573-636-9820 `r AMEREN UE— ELECTRIC 573-681-7513 AMEREN UE- GAS 573-681-7513 =e 1 EMBARQ—TEL 573-634-1686 sa MEDIACOM—CATV 573-635-3212 (0 c° CITY OF JEFFERSON— SEWER 573-634-6410 n 1 Qp0469868®p®pd� ��11 flfl 3 .ese.ee.. o1 1 ass �T CK E. 0 1 A SCALE:NONE p� 6 '!Z SHEET NUMBER ��`�O®�eyes4.a•,pPpeeee ® ��ee 1 1 ' z O tz • N��/`/ TAN511 OFFICE5 U t f5Tp00M❑ �_ o JUNG ION SOX _'::' „ -0„ z ' o SN�I.T�p o o ° a > WA p MMPI LLJ t .. 6' -o NSW C3U5 oV❑� 51 1.1�p El _ +1-20' CENlfA MANIEWa CRAG Tf � a °z i ° io' o.. 13 z o 1 O Q 0c LLJ z N J C. W ° W LL 13 Ln W ❑ z ' ❑ r. V1 O L3 c 0 5MCIFICAT10N5 00 C3 V1 0 5119M&K-PWp CITY5KCIFICAT10N5 ❑ m po°o IZ�STM P1511Jpf3 P AeA5 WITH 5019 PFP\CITY 5PECIFICA11ON5 W a°o ALL UT11.M5 AN19 TVF�5 fO PEMAIN =m ,a 0 TOM TF2� CANOPY A5 NECE55W\Y ° At7JU5T WTP\MMP\ANP JUNCTION DN o r COVWp5 TO NSW 51MW&K 6RAM 13 r ° - ❑ ❑ C3 PROJECT NO.: °® NSW 512WLK ' 63015 QV❑v DATE: ❑ E 06-14-08 ° r . ❑ PUSo r f +51PM&K �LEVATION5 0 I' 2 55001.82' 5I1'f, PLAN c m; 3 501,19' Cob 500,70' o°°° t�;L 1 pAN51 T OFFIa `���`°Q`q`1�oc.N,•®.6II0�IDI ,Lee FIN. fI.p, �. V - 500,00 ( NCH WWI) � F 13 4 Y FIN, FU, �LEV,- 501,52' °a❑� ' ?'''+: TICK E. too u • may' - ° SCALE:1132'-1'-0' ' FINS. p, �IM- 502.66' jA�e► , E-16996 ,r q SHEET NUMBER �XI5TIN6 51PEWXK a���9, ••••..........••••' �. "fESS10 2 1 ' z a FLA5H& SEAL WATERI1GHT u� 1 TO EX151IN6 51PING p p q°- z z 0 8"xa" TExTuREP CMu,11 T-811 W ' 5T '---FLOOR DP.AIN 9'-6" 4" CONC,FLOM Cd 220'-o' 1 i3U5 51.1�1.1�� zc-noN THRI 5N�Mr z 0 p � R J 1 W OC uj z = u- �, g �, L w c. IIA z o ' OC cc p� N P 00 + / - 10' J D tA LL m 1 CENTP,AL MAINTENANCE GAPAGtE o m 9 =p IQ 0- a 1 1 II ✓/�� GI � p O PLAN� PROJECT NO.: I 63015 1 DATE: 06-I4-08 1 %5 51-1ELTER 5PECIFICAVON5 51MILAR TO FLGRIAN SOLAR.IT,01?UCT5"51EWA" MODEL �APPROXIMATELY 10'-8" WIPE x 20'-10' ' LENGTH i LEAN TO 5ME- 2/12 ROOF PITCH R W O ALL METAL TO HAVE BRONZE FIN151 o PROVIDE WITH 6' x 7' POUDLE COMMERCIAL POOR O Id 1 PROVIDE CLOSER ANP REAP POLT LOCK KEYED TO EX15T1NG MA5TER �> 92" MIN FRONT WALL HEIGHT(76'' WALL PANEL+ 16" BASE WALL) 0ECiPOPipag w 3 ALUMINUM SKINNED IN5ULA912 PANEL ROOF `e�10 ®� ®� d, Z LOW E POUIXE PANE TEMPER. V Q A55 `�> Q'CE,,..�•••••...,g �, Y EXTRUPEP ALUMINUM F ME,CLEAT:SPAN,THERMALLY GRMN �� �= 4 0 1 COOLEENP5 �.� ICKE. _ �EJL FRAME OUT FOR ffU WALL HEAT PUMP Yy _�... 4"REINFORCEP CONCRETE FLOOR/TURNED DOWN SLAB ER SCALE:I 1- r-or DOWEL INTO EXI5TING FOUNDATION WALL -1 6 �+riy��.s SHEET NUMBER CONCRETE PER CITY 5PECIFICATION5 °s'd-��f'•. 4 16" HIGH MASONRY 13A5E WALL,VUEP CMU,COLOR& ��y� S3 '•`��� TEXTURE 5ELEC9P 6Y OWNER 3 Z _O • MACHINE DOOM t EXI5TING 100 A PANEL C-1 ce u W 0 Z Q Z O TM-I- T U W&L NEAT PUMP UNIT w FR w ' 1200[3TUN COOLING,5.6A LL; 10500(STUN NEA11%,5.8 A 12 , 8900 MH 6ACKUP IfAT,14,1 A PNL C-1 120V,20A 11.0 EEI? 208V,2 A 24 N?TIMEp,5MAPf PAN PIEMOtE CON11?OL PNI,C-1 z ' WALL 51 EEVE I20V,20A LIGNf FIX1Ui O LIGHT SW S oC w Tw Q Lu W LIGHT SWItCN � v", LIGNt�IXT'Uf� � � tA � o ' fV J m P 00 ® 5WFACE MOUNT CONDUIT w Ln m POUTS TO EX1511%PANEL C-1 • IN MACHINE DOOM, 5PAa 15 s m ,� N I AVAILA IN PANEL, PROVIDE p d a BLE MAKEpS ILI 5�C110N THVU 5HEMF 1 PROJECT NO.: CENTRAL MAINTENANCE 6XA2 63015 DATE: O6-I4-08 is a � CTIC& PLAN 0 Z R I , Le �a ao a . .w>WW ELECTOCAL 5PECIFICAnON5 `,`,�oOOD !s'��y a• m o o ALL ELECTRICAL WORK TO BE IN5TALLEn IN ACCOF\9ANCE WITH NEC A5 AVOMP BY TIt CITY ���ti~p'"�� 4 o�•�� A ' EXPOSED CONnUIt SHALL BE RIGIn n,i K E. a» _ 3 BoxES 5l-1ALL r3E wATEt;na-tr FIRE 5TOP&L WALL AND FLOOR PENETP.ATION5 R i Saa �E: ire•= i-o- ' i E- 69 r�r��aRe'a SHEET NUMBER •• •••••••.,.N.� •'`aye\ ����i��OffSS�ON�►=��� 4 or z ' O_ SPECIFICATIONS tA 1 I N CONCREII;-4000#/28DAY PER CI11'SPECIF(CA110N5 p M,CK&MORTAR TO MATCH EX151INCA A5 CLOSE A5 P0551 E p PROVIDE INDUSTRAL Cf'.ADE SEALER ON FLOOR z DOOR-COMMERCIAL CRAVE STEEL DOOR W,/ HM FRAME z HARDWARE-t7EADI30Lt,KEYED TO EXi%NG MASTER 1IZAN5IT OFFICES O PA55AGE 5ET-LEVER HANDLE N PROVIDE DOOR CL05ER W PROVIDE WEATHER STRIPING& SWEEP °C PAINT-ALL PAINTAIAX%PFACES TO RECEIVE w CPRIMER COAT AND TWO FINISH COATS COMMERCIAL Q ' F'.ADE SEMI-Gd.055 p METAL 5[ffAa5-DAP,K WONZE COLOR SHEETROCK-OFF WHITE p z ' NOTE; 5EE%EEt 6 FOR WALL SECTION z0 O 1` z w CC d W tA 0 Z 00 IJJ O ' LOCKER ROOM to P 00 A— — — — — ZD — — — — 00 • ®m // up 5tA �z ��--{ LEAVE WINDOW IN PLACE. FRAME OPENING ���--{ AND INSTALL 5HE TROGI.t0 CONCEAL M- 501,52' ® ® PAID OMAAtCNAI.00KE OOMP.AMING PROjECTNO.: 63015 i ' . 1 PIPING DOWN IN NEW FLOOR DATE: I TO CEILING CHASE 06-1-4-08 \ FRAME CHASE AND COVER WITH \ 9fETROCK, PAINT TO MATCH ��� \ Ell 00 LOCKER ROOM, PROVIDE ACCESS c 0 PANELS FOR PIPING AND COMTROLS - \ �_zf� �Za _I �o o / F E WICK 61' STUVWALL o J ' FPDF W 0 \RELOCAlT,CABLE ' ROOF OVERHANG 0 N WIRING ,�E 1 ap V— S�Ic ' F V 001\ 1 VAN SCALE: 1/4'- ,'-0' —�A . �•is S.A - 6 (•, SHEET NUMBER s,��®,�e�a� 5 t Z O E • u 5PfCIFICA110N5 w ' R00FING-25 YP,R1.1PMP,ROOF-PLACK COLOP, METAL aKtF,ANt7170WN5P0Uf-PARK WONa COLOR � MM CAP-PAW PPONZ�COLOR Z ' a SLOPE ROOF f0 a 1fV z O FLASH& SEAL WATER fIGNf fO EXI5MCA C31.U91NG D USE SILICONE SEALANT > W iW a o PAPJ2AAi'Ef z NOTE; 5EE SNEEf 6 FOR WALL 5ECION g Z O O z I- w ui N J / O -1 to W O m z VIP, ono / Q � / m � Y • O co u0 1 \ \ PROJECT NO.: `-- — — 63015 DATE: 06-14-08 T� i Poor � aif9p, � � nowNSPOUf& i I SPLASH C3LOCK c:m R I" O La 0 .A J v/>L i �° m ``` 10 •�•••NH4Ny� �pCP r O • L V W�, Y = 1 Ic i •-v ZE SCALE:1/4'= 1'-U 96 .E SHEETNUMBER z O_ • pU6I3Mp Moor 3/4'' f'M00t7 Moor MCK E w ' GUMP, 6" FIP F6I A551N%LA110N u MM FASCIA � z Q z 2x10 poor FpAMING O META,50FFI1 1/2" CEMEW BOAR, ' VNTW 2 I.AYt:M5 ui 2xh5TUI7 H MICK Q 5 I/2" Fln,Ci-A55 INSUI.A110N O I" IN% A110N POAPP 4" CONCMM FLOOM Z oZ O 2" IN%LA110N G 2 Q w ui ` N f N J ..r'•. J V1 � J PMOVIVe 5M STRIP M WEFN 6OTTOM a °C "' PLAt AW CONCFM m z ui t„ Q o u� � _ CCO W&L 5�010N a • LA MU V,poor CANE o a M�1"AL CAP I MM FASCIA ' PROJECT NO.: 63015 DATE: 06-14-08 WEAL 50FrIT j}- VFNTEP poor 5FC110N a w r 5MCIFICA110N5 00 . o 00FING-25 Y,RUMP,p00E-LUCK CGLOp 4A J . ' MWL GUi"11;p ANn t70WN5POUf-t2) WK MONZE COLOP L o MM,CAP-t7AP.K DMONZF COI.Op Qv o SLOPE poor TO GMP, ``o�&V � •. � ' rLA5H& 5M WATEM 116Hr TO ftl511NG PUILVING o� U5r,SILICONE;5MANt U y • `° li • Z L WA SCALE:NONE x w� E. SHEETNUMBER 7 o� • 1 .i ll lilil ■. . i .ii■�iiiil ■. ■. no 0 MIUMMIENNIMMMISM ■. � .lilll ..iii .. .iiiil ■. ..lil•. i .. • ■ ..iii .. ■ on .iiill on IS. an .1.■iVLil .. ..ittttY7� ■. ■ .l. IMMMII IS ■ ..iii i ■ ..iii ■. SIM ■ .iliii ■. ■ .iiiil ■. ■ ■.iii ■. ■ ..iii ■. ®,,,' I 'II G / R i • • • • ■l lliiiliilil■..ili. ■l iii lilt--1ii�•iii. • • oe LLJ ONENESS u NOMINEES ■.iiilli� �ii.■.il� .i iiili i■ lii�.iil• .iilllii■ lii■..iii. ■iiiiiiiiiiii■./iii. ■.iii/liililil.■.il� SEEK .l l it l l ll l it l..•ill. liillli�•ii 1. r.i-1 l l 111 l/l l•I..l l.. .ililiiillili■..ill. ■.iiiiliii iiii.■.ii� •• •lliil lii lili!•iil. . ■.iiiiiiiiiiii.■.ii■. �iiliiil�i i■.M•li■ ■.ilililiilii.■.i i■. ..iiliiiiiii ie�li■. .iiiiliiiiiii■B.iii. ..11l.l.illill/lietl.l i.. .il liilli liil■..iii. ■.illlilll ill i.sl l� •llliilli lil i..e ii■ �illillliilli. ii■. . • • ..11llll�lli.�ll ill■ _ ■iiiii�■ili■.liiiii■. iliiiil�lli■__ii ill■ ■ii: MEMO i■ ■ii• . USES �■ ■.t■ • � SIMMS MESSINESS■lli/lam■ill ■�WOMIN ill lill�ili.� .�■ �illlililli/� �■ ■ill li...11i...l. r..l viii/lI■.ili■� �■ ■iiili�■ill■.1■ ■� �iillililli.� ...■ ■.iiilil..11i■� MWES Wi SEEN illl/Bill i.� ■m ■ill ii�.iii■.t■ ■� ■li/ll�■Viii. ■� ■.liiiil■.11i.� tom■ ol ililiilMMMlll.IN ■il lily■ill■.1■ SEEM SEEN i I FL-1 VW pit's z ' _o E • u 5PfCIFICATI0N5 Q',AC3 W,,- 6OPOCK 13-6806 5T.51. FINISH z Q ' FAPK1?TOW L HOLM, T1551 HOI. P,-f3OOCK a-M, z TI55U�HOI.PW-(ODOCK 6-M, O �J WL( VOL�,5A11N FIN15H vn 5UFFAa MOUNT W Ip TOWf:I.bI5PTN5EP-130MICK 6-262 ,LL; 5UF,FACr MOUNT H WC ST. 5TL 5A11N FINISH 0 MIPPOP,-130M,CK C3-2901836 O 5T,5TL FEZAM�,TAMM f, 515TANT z Vyt5f �L. VA110N OCK1NCA n CE5/ coNC�Ai�n I z z O ce W 115 NJ W- W W W V- a, i V1 Uy m_ z LIC,f-IT 5WITCH &CAM � N °0 — a � m co ® � > -iI W W xoi . . '0. WOFTH �I.MION 4iROJECT NO.: -N 63015 DATE: 06-14-06 FL-1 T 1 p a M If3:Of? i e W. O0. �5U HOU9EPI PAPER TOWN.NO MR N 9 Lc: WC 'iS110i�fi®/dPj�� _ i o pF 'Af "".G���� +�� e•. P ICK -I • ^� ,/ W� N W°° SCALE: 1/4 m 1'-0' R Z. SHUTNUMBER 50UTH �VAWN A- E-16 6 f v O ' 5nCIFICAWN5 • WC- WVL�Y WC1249rM,TOP 5JPPI.Y-P5W-PP-I.CMC-65KT5T u 5TAINLE55 5trl, APA COMPLIANT W 5�N50I?TYPE PLU5H VAI-V� ° ° LAV- 13P.ALUY LAV6175FM-136-AXM-Nf-T-NH-TMA a ' 5TAINL1�55 ST��L, APA COMPLIANT o UR- 13P.AIUY UI?18000-1313-LCTTfC-TOP SUPPLY 5TAINL�55 AnA COMPLIANT W ' 5�N50I;TYPE FLU5H VALVE PPI7P- NA.51�Y TAYLOI;4405f P,IWINKIN6 CJ FOUNTAIN- PP,�EZ� IT,515TANT — o ' FP-ZUPN Z2210-PVC-CP o FCO- ZURN ZI x}51 Z ' [?WV PIPING- 5CH�o PVC o F WTI;PIPING-TYPE L COPPW H H w �I STOP FLOOI;ANP WALL PENETP,AWN5 W � m W LL Ln E2 Z W � N O CL � 00 PfN� ATE L CK[p I;OOM FLOOI;ANP FOUTf a TP. m PIPING ff-L f OOP,TO TIC IN LOCA11ON5 IN P.-5T O 5 C N LOWED L�V�L m J W W °aa- � m WC Z �n 5 PROJECT NO.: 4W I'� "W 63015 \ DATE: 06-14-08 F11IAV Z R ' aWe F" i� 0 Le! d RFWH >~ L.o FPt7� �n�MOV��XIStING�p ``�`�610E�Z�dG3pBB�o� ��o ,•,NNN•4.�ol�oo� F Y • SCALE: 1/4'- )'-0- PLUMPING PLAN -16 6 e��� SHEET NUMBER �•'���fESS1�� )��gN z ' O_ WINTEp CONTIOL 5EQUENCE E • MOTION CIETECTO? p ENEPUZE511Mfp El , u ' ACTIVATING L16Hr & EXHAU5T FAN(FL-I) W TIMEF 9-KL PE-ENEFUZE EXH FAN ANP L16K o WHEN TIMEn OUT C AbJ, 0-60 MIN) a TM OpEM5 FFOM INTEPN& CONT Gl PANEL z 0 LA 5UMMEP,CONTP.O. 5EQUENCE M I N b CT I; [D N .GIZ 511 p p, — ce ACTIVATING L16Hr & EXW5T FAN C�I.-I) w TIMEp 9-KL t?E-ENEpGIZE EXN FAN ANO UOrt" a ' WN TIMEn OUT(At)J. 0-60 MIN) ° TM OpEM5 FPOM INTUN& CONTC a PANEL o z ' TWU-2- TWU WALL:HW/COOL.UNIt z KEPOCH M5 o O i~ 7700 t3f JH COOLING,5bA z w 1NG 4000 MH H�AT ,! ,B A I :5 ; N ce w WALL SLUV� Q -j v LO m Z 00 U ccil tA � m • _° �dd t f L'I D E1 �•1� CEl _ 1 • PROJECT NOS 63015 \ / Ell DATE: ° 06-14-08 � / • ' F c z W 0 , 61,6" VENT PIP" ° tAWL L.Wi F o HVAC FLAN P ICK •s �= u = � — IV SCALE: 1/4 -1'-0• E. 9 tJi: SHEET NUMBER ' z O_ • — u ' W z ' a z O LU LU KAY ACTUMP 5WITCH OVEMIT5 p w 5r, 5H�ff 11 FO:CONIFa 5MNa Lii 6rcl- PUPLEX i o o z ' z TW J-2 o Z F gam° aW CONNECT TO PAM "AA" J W A LLJ IN 12151 ATCH OFFICE w J V1 LL; m z VN1 O ' J W co T W U tn $J a I a • I �o 0 ' O \ NSW 60 A f'AN�L 1 a PROJECT NO.: 63015 ' DATE: FXTMIOI;LIGHT- I 06-14-08 5UTACF MOUNT POOP ' W/ PHOtO CALL 11 A110N zR ' 5f'ECIFICA110N5 O Lo FL-I MOAN OfXFI50FLT 150 CFM, 120V �' ' oa���a�cceerr,•�r ��o P�ffOPM ALL f IECTMCAL WOf3'.IN ACCOf�2ANa s WITH NBC A5 A19OM19 PY 11f CITY 4�� ,�Q,.�...................��fi� : 40-1 u ZICK ma a "- SCALE:114•-V-W E-16996 �,��0; SHEETNUMBER 'J ~•....YIH.•�� s. ' z O_ u W 5nCIFICA110N5 ° CONCP,M- 28PAY COMp1E55W 5TITN6TH OF 4000 P51 z 506M- 4" COMPAC-02 Ci ANLLAP,MATEPIA. z 5AW JOINTS TO 1/5 OF TNT 510M PEPM O- Vf 5UPZFAC� 51 lAU HAVE NON-SLIP WOOM FIN15H W pit MPICLILAP,TO ff 5112WAI.K ce CJ PPOVIP� 1/2" WAN510N JOINTS- MAX 125' SPACING ppOVM WAN510N JOINT APJACENT TO plGin 5T130M,5 0 o z ' 4" CONCkM 5112M&K z a N F 4" COMPAC-rW PA5F. ' 8 0 ( � (AW ZA P opera m m SECTION THFU 5112MU W W • =p � a a ' PROJECT NO.: 6301 .5 ' 5AW JOINT DATE: 8' MAX f a Z 9 5AW JOINT PFTAII, moo: XN mw `0��111allOdi96ir'/P/j '��a z • _ .';GALE:NONE `6 96 SHEETNUMRER FESSI 13 h ' Z O E • a U Z ' a Z O AMC, VIKON5 MA LLI ' APJ. APJUSTVL� w CMU CONCrM MA50NPY UNIT Lij vwv LAIN, WASTE, VENT o ! Fco FL00I;CLAN OUT Fn FLOOp PmN °z FIN.FI.p, fIN15N1�n FLOOI; ' rr> FIN19V2 FLOOp�I.M-110N o 0 ppnF pp��Z� pp00F npINKING FOUNTAIN z cc FAWN FI��Z� pp00F WALL HYbf.ANANT °— ~ J i GFCI 6POUNP FAULT CIPCUIT IN1�t�3.I P, a W u; LAV I.AVAT0PY W � � PNL PANEL m Ln o Tm T-IPIJ WALL UNIT Q 00 ST STL STAINL�55 511;�L a vi 5w 5WITCH 00 ' Up URINAL • WC WA1M,CLOSET o 1 Lou. to WTI WATUp N PROJECT NO.: 63015 ' DATE: 06-1 4-08 a� za �w 000 �W L �L O, 3 div 0�_n]0 `0. S��u /tlL R = rSHEET E:i/a•_ -o•:��' NUMBER '� '��► -16996 •i��,',':; �uu-xa-�eea 15 �1 JEFF CITY COMM DEVELOPMEN. . 573 634 6562 P.01 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 PROJECT NO.63015 t BUS TRANFER STATION 820 E.MILLER J* 18,2008 1 The bidder will acknowledge receipt of this Addendum and his acceptance of its conditions by ' signing this Addendum and including it with his bid. ' BIDDER: United HRB General Contractors, Inc. .ti ' BY: Elmer 0. Kiesling, P.E. ' TITTLE: Vice President ' 1. The rebid minutes b there inclusion herein are made'part of the contract. P Y P ' 2. The water closet, lavatory, and urinal as listed on sheet ten of the plans have been . changed. The contractor shall install these items as listed below: ' a. WC Bradley Model WC7449FM-TOP-PSEAT-BB-NFV-GSKT floor mounted, siphon jet,wall outlet s.s.water closet with top spud, open front seat, gasketed flange outlet in bead blast finish. Sloan Model 8111 battery operated, electronic ' eye flush valve. b. LAV=Bradley Model LAV6101FM-4"SET-TNH-AB wall hung s.s.lavatory with 4"centerset hole punch, 1 '/z"tailpiece, and angle braces in bead blast finish. Chicago Faucet Model 802-665CP dual pushbutton metering faucet. c. UR—Bradley Model UR18002FM-TOP-BB-NFV wall hung,blowout s.s. urinal with top spud in bead blast finish. Sloan Model 8180-1 battery operated, electronic eye flush valve. 1 - CITY OF JEFFERSON,MISSOURI ' PATRICK E. SULLIVAN,P.E. DIRCTOR OF COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 1 • • 1 1 FINANCE DEPARTMENT PURCHASING DIVISION SUBJECT: Bid 2405 - Project No. 63015 - Bus Transfer Station Community Development- Transit Opened July 22, 2008 BIDS RECEIVED: United HRB General Contractors, Inc. Jefferson City, MO $ 116,790.00* GBH Builders, Jefferson City, MO $ 121,901.20 *Adjusted to $91,271.00 through reduction in scope. FISCAL NOTE: 6300-6300-7000-0030 3503-9900-7350-5013 Purchase Improve - Building& Grounds Sales Tax E - Transit Matching 2007-08 Budget $ 240,805.00 2007-08 Budget $ 260,000.00 • Expended -0= Expended -0- Bid 2405 $ 73,016.80 Bid 2405 $ 18,254.20 Balance $ 167,788.20 Balance $ 241,745.80 The low bid of$116,790.00 as submitted by United HRB General Contractor,Inc. exceeded funds allocated for the project. Upon discussions with the contractor the costs were reduced to $91,271.00 by deleting item 43 - "4" Thick PCC Sidewalk" and reductions of $7,429.00 in item #1 "Restroom Facility". PAST PERFORMANCE: This vendor has completed projects as specified and bid in the past. RECOMMENDATION: Staff recommends award of the bid to United HRB General Contractors, Inc. in the amount of$91,271.00. ATTACHMENTS - SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION • Signatures Purcha ng kgent Direct r, Co e lopment • • • Page 1 CITY OF JEFFERSON Date:July 22'08 BID TABULATION Bid No.2405 BUS TRANSFER STATION 820 E.MILLER PROJECT NO.63015 United HRB Gen.Contractors ENGINEER'S ESTIMATE Inc. GBH Builders APPROX. UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY PRICE AMOUNT PRICE AMOUNT PRICE AMOUNT PRICE AMOUNT 1 Restroom Facility LS 1 $33,090.00 $33,090.00 $50,700.00 $50,700.00 $55,600.00 $55,600.00 2 Bus Shelter LS 1 $45,660.00 $45,660.00 $48,000.00 $48,000.00 $51,300.00 $51,300.00 3 4"Thick PCC Sidewalk SY 270 $30.37 $8,199.90 $67.00 $18,090.00 $55.56 $15,001.20 TOTAL BASE BID $86,949.90 $116,790.00 $121,901.20 %OVER/UNDER ENGINEER'S EST. 34.3%1 40.2%